Prakrit Exercise Book

Author(s): Kamalchand Sogani
Publisher: Apbhramsa Sahitya Academy
Catalog link: https://jainqq.org/explore/006529/1

Page #1

Prakrta Exercise Book (English Translation of the Author's Book in Hindi
*Prākṣta Abhyāsa Saurabha')
Dr. Kamal Chand Sogani
णाणुज्जीवी जीवो जैनविद्या संस्थान श्री महावीरजी
Apabhraṁsa Sahitya Academy
Jaina Vidyā Samsthāna Digambara Jaina Atiśaya Kșetra Śri Mahāvīraji
Rajasthan
in Education International

Page #2

Prākṣta Exercise Book (English Translation of the Author's Book in Hindi
‘Praksta Abhyāsa Saurabha')
Dr. Kamal Chand Sogani (Former Professor of Philosophy M.L. Sukhadia University
Udaipur)
Published by Apabhraṁsa Sahitya Academy
Jaina Vidya Saṁsthāna Digambara Jaina Atiśaya Kșetra Śri Mahaviraji
Rajasthan

Page #3

Publisher:
Apabhramsa Sahitya Academy
(Jaina Vidya Samsthāna)
Digambara Jaina Atiśaya Kṣetra Śri Mahāviraji Śri Mahāvīraji - 322 220 (Rajasthan)
Copies From:
1.
2.
Jaina Vidya Samsthāna
Śri Mahaviraji - 322 220 (Rajasthan) Telephone: 07469-2224323
Sahitya Vikraya Kendra
Digambara Jaina Nasiyam Bhaṭṭārakaji Savai Ramasimha Road, Jaipur - 302 004 Tel.: 0141-2385247
All rights reserved
First Edition: 2006
Price: Rs. 400/- US$ 20
-
Computer Typesetting:
Shyam Agarwal
A-336, Malviya Nagar,
Jaipur 302 017 (Rajasthan) Ph.: 0141-2524138
Printed at:
Jaipur Printers Pvt. Ltd.
M.I. Road, Jaipur - 302 001
Telephone: 0141-2373822, 2362468

Page #4

Contents
Exercise No.
Subject
Page No.
Basic book for solving
Exercises
Prelusive
Dedication
Introduction
Present Tense
Prāksta Grammar and Composition Lessons 1 to 8
Imperative
Prāksta Grammar and Composition Lessons 9 to 16
Past Tense
12
Prakrta Grammar and Composition Lessons 17 to 18
Future Tense
15
Prāksta Grammar and Composition Lessons 19 to 26 Praksta Grammar and Composition Lesson 27
19
Intransitive Verbs
Reviewal
24
Praksta Grammar and Composition Lessons 1 to 16 Prakrta Grammar and Composition Lessons 19 to 26
Reviewal
29
Reviewal
33
Praksta Grammar and Composition Lessons 1 to 27
Reviewal
37
Prāksta Grammar and Composition Lessons 1 to 27
Praksta Exercise Book

Page #5

Subject
Exercise No.
Basic book for solving · Page No.
Exercises
10.
Absolutive
40
Prāksta Grammar and Composition Lesson 28
11.
45
12.
50
Infinitive
Praksta Grammar and Composition
Lesson 29 Reviewal
Praksta Grammar and Composition
Lessons 28-29 a-ending
Prākṣta Grammar and Masculine Nouns Composition (Singular Number Lessons 30-31 and Intransitive Verbs)
13.
54
14.
59
15.
64
a-ending
Prakrta Grammar and Masculine Nouns Composition (Plural Number) Lesson 32 a-ending
Praksta Grammar and Neuter Nouns Composition (Singular Number Lessons 34-35 and Intransitive Verbs) a-ending
Prakrta Grammar and Neuter Nouns Composition (Plural Number) Lesson 36
16.
69
17.
74
ā-ending
Prakrta Grammar and Feminine Nouns Composition (Singular Number Lessons 38-39 and Intransitive Verbs)
18.
a-ending Feminine Nouns (Plural Number)
Prákyta Grammar and Composition Lesson 40 Prāksta Grammar and Composition Lessons 30 to 40
19.
Reviewal
84
iV
· Prákyta Exercise Book

Page #6

Exercise
Subject :
Page No.
Basic book for solving
Exercises
No.
20.
89.
Past Participle (Active Voice)
Prāksta Grammar and Composition Lesson 42
21.
Present Participle
96
Prakrta Grammar and Composition Lesson 43
22.
103
Past Participle (Impersonal Form)
23.
Reviewal
109
Prāksta Grammar and Composition Lesson 45 Prāksta Grammar and Composition Lessons 1 to 45 Prāksta Grammar and Composition Lesson 47
24.
112
Intransitive Verbs (impersonal Form)
25.
116
26.
119
27.
123
Obligatory and Prakrta Grammar and Potential Participle Composition (Impersonal Form) Lesson 49 Reviewal
Prākṣta Grammar and Composition
Lessons 42 to 49 Noun-Pronoun Prāksta Grammar and (Transitive Verbs) Composition Accusative Case Lessons 51-52 (Singular & Plural) Transitive Verbs Präkrta Grammar and
Composition
Lesson 53 Nouns
Prāksta Grammar and (i, i - ending and Composition u, ū - ending Mas. Lessons 55 to 61 Neu. and Fem.)
28.
128
29.
130
Prāksta Exercise Book

Page #7

Exercise Subject
No.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
vi
Nouns
and
Verbs
Nouns and
Transitive Verbs
Participles
Passive Voice
(Instrumental Case)
Different Participles
Noun-Pronoun Dative and Genitive
Case
(Singular & Plural)
Noun-Pronoun
Ablative Case,
Locative Case
(Singular & Plural)
Causative Suffixes
Retainer of Innate
Meaning Suffixes
(Svarthika Suffixes)
Different Pronouns &
Indeclinables
Irregular
Passive Voice
Irregular
Past Participle

Basic book for solving Exercises
Präkrta Grammar and
Composition
Lessons 30 to 40 and
Lessons 54 to 59
Präkṛta Grammar and
Composition
Lessons 53-54
Präkṛta Grammar and Composition Lessons 57-62
Prākṛta Grammar and Composition
Lesson 64
Präkṛta Grammar and Composition
Lessons 66 to 69
Präkrta Grammar and Composition
Lessons 7 1 to 77
Präkrta Grammar and Composition
Lesson 78
Präkṛta Grammar and
Composition
Lessons 79 to 81

Page No.
133
136
139
143
145
147
150
153
156
159
Pråkrta Exercise Book

Page #8

Subject
Page No.
Exercise No.
Basic book for solving
Exercises
40.
169
Abbreviations and Method of Grammatical Analysis
41.
174
Pråksta Story and Its English Translation (Kassesă Bhajjā)
42.
180
Grammatical Analysis of the Story (Kassesă Bhajjā)
Praksta Exercise Book
vii

Page #9

Page #10

Diacritical Marks
Vowels
co
Consonants
در
sol
م
ل کر
still
امر بم.
is
امر به
She
#
مهر
لحر -
هر ه
. (Anusvāra)
: (Visarga)
m
Prákrta Exercise Book

Page #11

Page #12

Prelusive
We feel great pleasure in placing 'Prākṛtā Exercise Book' in the hands of the readers. In fact, this book is the English translation of the second edition of 'Präkṛtā Abhyasa Saurabha' published in 2004 by the Apabhramsa Sahitya Academy, Jaipur.
It goes without saying that Prākṛtā language is one of the richest Indo-Aryan languages. It is the most ancient and sacred language of India. The early Vedic literature is not averse to Prākṛta expressions, which indicate its ancient character. It is incontrovertible that Präkṛta was the mother-tongue of Mahāvira and Buddha, who used this language as the medium of their sermons. Prākṛta, the flowing language gave rise to Apabhramsa in course of time.
It is of capital importance to note that Prakrta is the language of the masses. Its vast literature in varied literary forms contributes to the dignity and excellence of the cultural heritage of Indian tradition. The author of the Agamas and their commentaries, Kundakunda, Hāla, Vimalasuri, Śivārya, Vattakera, Haribhadra, Vākapatirāja, Pravarasene, Nemicandra, Kartikeya Svami, Hemacandra etc. are the celebrated literary personalities of Prākṛta language.
In the 3rd century B.C. it was the lingua franca of Northern India. From East to West and Kasmir (North) to Mahārāṣtra (South), it has served the need of literary world as also of the common men. It is to the credit of Präkṛta language that it has given rise to Apabhramsa language from which the modern Indian languages like Sindhi, Pañjābi, Marathi, Bengali, Gujarati, Kaśmiri, Maithili, Rajasthani, Uḍiya etc. have grown. Even the national language Hindi owes its origin to Prākṛta and Apabhraṁśa. Most of the literary tendencies in Hindi literature flow from the glorious tradition of Prākṛta and Apabhramśa language. Thus the relation between Präkṛta-Apabhraṁśa and Hindi is very intimate. In consequence, the proper understanding of Prākṛta and Apabhramsa
Präkrta Exercise Book

xi

Page #13

language and literature is indispensible for comprehending the development of Hindi literature rightly and adequately.
Recognising the importance of Prāksta and Apabhraíśa languages in the cultural history of India, the Managing Committe of Digambara Jaina Atiśaya Kșetra, Śri Mahāviraji established Apabhraíśa Sāhitya Academy in 1988, which runs correspondence courses for teaching Prāksta and Apabhraíśa languages. The Academy has published books for the implementation of these courses. Books on Prāksta Grammar and Composition, Prāksta Exercises, Apabhraíśa Grammar and Composition, Apabhraíśa Exercises have been published for those desirous of learning Praksta and Apabhramśa languages through Hindi medium. For teaching Prāksta language to the English knowing people, our new publication, 'Praksta Exercise Book' which is the English translation of 'Prákyta Abhyasa Saurabha' in Hindi will facilitate the learning of Prāksta to the students of English language. 'Apabhraṁsa Grammar and Composition' and 'Prakrta Grammar and Composition' have already been published. 'Apabhraíśa Exercise Book’ is in the process of publication.
We offer our thanks to the learned researchers of the Saṁsthana (Institute) specially Smt. Shakuntala Jain and to M/s Jaipur Printers Pvt. Ltd. for organising the publication of the book.
Naresh Kumar Sethi Narendra Patni Dr. Kamal Chand Sogani President Secretary
Samyojaka Managing Committee
Jaina Vidya Samsthāna Samiti Digambara Jaina Atiśaya Kșetra
Jaipur Śri Mahāviraji
Mahavira Jayanti 11 April, 2006
xii
Praksta Exercise Book

Page #14

Dedicated
To Dr. A.N. Upadhye
And Dr. Hiralal. Jain
Prakrta Exercise Book
xiit

Page #15

Page #16

Introduction Relating to Prāksta language, the following should be understood.
Alphabets of Praksta
Vowels 31, 371, 3, 2, 3, 3, 8, 377 a, a, i, i, u, ū, e, o
-
Consonants as, a, 7, 9, 3 ka, kha, ga, gha, na 7, 5, , 57, 37 ca, cha, ja, jha, ña č, 3, 5, 7, u ţa, tha, da, dha, ņa
ta, tha, da, dha, na a ", q, H, pa, pha, ba, bha, ma
ya,
ra,
la, va
sa, ha . (Anusvāra) m,
(Anunāsika)
It may be noted here that in Prakrta the use of na and ña is not found in non-conjunct form. In Hemacandra Prákyta Grammar the use of na and ña in conjunct form is traceable. The use of na is seen in conjunct and non-conjunct form. The alternative of na, ña, na in conjunct form is m.
Praksta Exercise Book
XV

Page #17

Number :
In Prakrta language, there are only two numbers :1. Singular
2. Plural Gender:
In Prāksta language, there are three Genders :1. Masculine Gender
2. Feminine Gender 3. Neuter Gender Person :
In Prakrta language, there are only three Persons :1. First Person
2. Second Person 3. Third Person
Case :
In Prāksta language, there are eight Cases :1. Nominative Case
2. Accusative Case 3. Instrumental Case
4. Dative Case 5. Ablative Case
6. Genitive Case 7. Locative Case
8. Vocative Case Verb:
In Prāksta language, there are only two kinds of Verbs 1. Transitive
2. Intransitive Tense :
In Prāksta language, there are four type of Tenses :1. Present Tense
2. Past Tense 3. Future Tense
4. Imperative Words :
In Prāksta language, four kinds of Words are in use :1. a-ending
2. i-i-ending 3. ā- ending
4. u-u-ending
xvi
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #18

The Vocalic sounds of the Devanagari Syllabary in combination with the
consonants of the syllabary
का
की
H
कि ki
कु ku
정의,
ka
E
kha
ख kha
खा khá
खि khi
खी khi
खु khu
खू khó
खे khe
खो kho
ग ga
गा gå
गि gi
गी gi
गु gu
गू gu
गे ge
गो go
gha
घ pha
घा ghẻ
घि ghi
घी ghi
घु giu
घू ghụ
घे ghe
घो gho
Prakrta Exercise Book
xvil

Page #19

na
má
fini
ruhủ
ne
no
चा
لعي
العو
र
चि ci
cā
2
2
४
cha
. छ cha
- छा cha
छि chi
छी chi
छु chu
छू chủ
छे che
छो cho
|
ज ja
जा já
जि ji
जी ji
जु ju
जू ju
जे je
जो jo
झ jha
झा jhả
झि jhi
झी jhi
झु jhu
झू jhu
झे jhe
झो jho
xviii
Praksta Exercise Book

Page #20

ña
य
ञ
ञा
जि
जी
जु
ने
जो
na
ni
ट
टा t
टि
टी
टु
टू
टे
टो
-
tha
ठठा ठि tha tha thi
ठी thi
ठु thu
ठू thu
ठे the
ठो tho
ड da
डा da
डि di
डी di
डु du
डू du
डे de
डो do
dha __ ढ ढा ढिढी
dha dha dhi dhi
दु dhu
दू ढे dhủ' dhe
ढो dho
Pråksta Exercise Book
xix

Page #21

ण
na
त
ta
65
थ
tha
da
ध
dha
XX
ण
na
त
ta
tha
द
da
ध
dha

णा
ṇā
ता
tā
था
tha
दा
dã
ཝཱ
dhā
णि
व
ni
थि
thi
दि
di
$
धि
dhi
ni
ti ti
t n
ती
थी
thi
di
धी
dhi
णु णू
nu
ņū
तु
tu
थु
thu
दु
du
(15)
dhu

तू
tū
کو
थू
thū
दू
dů
धू
dhū
णे
ne
नट
te
थे
the
दे
de
dhe
णो
no
तो
to
थो
tho
दो
do
धो
dho
Präkrta Exercise Book
.

Page #22

na
न na
ना nå
नि ni
नी ni
नु nu
नू nů
ने ne
नो no
pa
प pa
पा på
पि pi
पी pi
पु pu
पू pů
पे pe
पो po
pha
फफा pha phi
फि phi
फी phí
फु phu
फू phu
फे phe
फो pho
Ba
ब ba
बा ba
बि bi
बी bi
बु bu
बू - बे bü be
बो bo
Bha
भ भाभि bhabhá bhi
भी bhi
भु bhu
भू bhủ
भे bhe
भो bho
Ma
Ma
म मा ma má
मि mi
मी मु मू मे मो mi mu mu me mo
Praksta Exercise Book
xxi

Page #23

य ya
या yå
यि यी yiyi
यु yu
यू yü
ये ye
यो yo
र रारिरी रु रू रे रो ra ré ri ru ru rū re ro
ला
लि
ली
العو
ल
ले
लो
=
व
. वा
वू
वि
वी vi
वु vu
वे ve
và
.
1.
स sa
सा să
सि si
सी s i
सु su
सू sú
से. se
सो so
ह
Ha
ha
hả
hi
hi
hu
hu
ho
ho
xxii
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #24

Exercise 1 (A) Translate the following sentences into Pråksta. Write all the
alternatives of the inflected Personal Pronouns and the Verbal forms. 1. He laughs. 2. They both dance. 3. You hide. 4. I sulk. 5. They both wake up. 6. We all sleep. 7. You all live. 8. They all stay. 9. I bathe. 10. She becomes. 11. You both laugh. 12. We all dance. 13. They all hide. 14. You sulk. 15. I wake up. 16. He sleeps. 17. They all live. 18. I stay. 19. They bathe. 20. You all become. 21. You dance. 22. They all laugh. 23. She hides. 24. They all sulk. 25. You wake up. 26. You all sleep. 27. I live. 28. We all stay. 29. She bathes. 30. They both become. 31. I laugh. 32. You all dance. 33. We hide. 34. She sulks. 35. We all wake up. 36. I sleep. 37. She lives. 38. You stay. 39. We both bathe. 40. I become. 41. You laugh. 42. He dances. 43. I hide. 44. We all sulk. 45. You both wake up. 46. They all sleep. 47. We both live. 48. She stays. 49. You all stay. 50. You bathe. 51. We laugh. 52. I dance. 53. You both hide. 54. You all sulk. 55. She wakes up. 56. you sleep. 57. You live. 58. You both stay. 59. You both bathe. 60. We all become.
Examples :1. He laughs - So
Hasai/Hasae/Hasadi/
Hasade/Hasei/Hasedi. 8. They all stay = (i) Tä/Tāu/ Thànti-Thanti/
Tão
Thante + Thante/Tháire. (ii) Te
Thanti-Thanti/
Thante Thante/Thăire. 15.I wake up = Ahaṁ/Ham/ Jaggami/Jaggami/
Ammi Jaggemi.
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 1, study lessons 1 to 8 of “Praksta Grammar and Composition".
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #25

39. We both bathe - Amhe/Vayam
56. You sleep
= Tumam/Tum/
Nhámo/Ņhamu/ Nhảma. Sayasi/Sayase/ Sayesi. Thāha/Thadha/ Thāitthā.
Tuha
58. You both stay - Tumhe/Tujjhel
Tubbhe
(B) Translate the following sentences into Praksta according to
the rules given in the footnotes of the lessons 1 to 8 of “Präkta Grammar and Composition". Lesson . 1 Rule (3) (a-ending Verb) 1. I sulk. 2. I wake up. 3. I live. 4. I sleep. 5. I dance. Lesson - 2 Rule (1) (ii) 6. You hide. 7. You dance. 8. You sulk. 9. You sleep. 10. You bathe. Lesson - 3 Rule (1) (ii, iii), Rule (2) (iii) 11. He sleeps. 12. He becomes. 13. He dances. 14. He lives. 15. He laughs. Lesson - 8 Rule (6) (i, ii, iii) 16. We all dance. 17. I bathe. 18. She lives. 19. They all stay. 20. You both laugh. 21. You sulk. 22. You all live. 23. She becomes. 24. They all sulk. 25. She bathes.
Examples : - 1. Isulk - Aham/Haṁ/ Ammi Rusaṁ. 6. You hide : Tumas/Tum/Tume Lukkasi/Lukkase/Lukkesi. 11. He sleeps - Sa/Se
Sayati/Sayeti. 16. We all dance - Amhe/Vayam Naccejja/Naccejjā. 19. They all stay : (i) Ta/Tau/Tào Thajja/Thảjja/Thaeja/Thieja. (ii) Te
Thājja/Țhājja/Thãejja/Thãejjā. 23. She becomes - Sã
Hojja/Hojjā/Hoejja/Hoejjā.
Prákyta Exercise Book

Page #26

(C) Write the inflected Personal Pronouns in agreement with the
Number of the following Verbal forms.
Naccanti 2. Jaggemi
4.
Rūsai
5.
Thami
7.
Lukkadha 8.
Nhãma
10.
Jaggasi 11.
Sayae
13.
Naccamo 14.
Rusaha
16.
Nhamo 17.
Sayam
19.
Lukketi 20.
Thai
22.
...... Jivittha
23.
25. Naccam 26.
28.
Jivedi
29.
31. Jaggire 32.
34.
Lukkesi 35.
37. Jaggemo 38.
40.
...... Hasante
41.
43.
Homa
44.
46.
Nhãha
47.
49.
Lukkamu 50.
52. Hodi
53.
55.
Sayeti 56.
58.
Sayante 59.
61.
Naccemi 62.
64. Sayȧmi 65.
67. Hoejjā 68. Examples: .
1.
......
......
......
......
......
******
......
......
******
******
1. Tä/Te
2. Aham/Ham/Ammi
3. Amhe/Vayam
Prákrta Exercise Book

......
3.
6.
9.
12.
15.
18.
21.
Jaggante
24.
Rūsesi
27.
Hoha
30.
Rüsemi
33.
Naccase
36.
Sayade
Rusedha
39.
Jivamu
........ Lukkeitthȧ
42.
Thäsi
Rūsejjä
45.
Jiventi
Naccati
48.
Hasae
Sayaha 51.
Jagganti
Naccante 54.
Nhäejjā
Nhāitthā
57.
Rūsenti
Thadi
60.
Jivam
Rūsase
63.
Naccai
Sayei
66.
Jivaha
Sayamo
69. Sayenti
......
................
......
******
******
......
******
......
******
******
Naccanti.
Jaggemi.
Sayama.

******
******
******
......
******
******
******
******
******
......
******
......
Sayama
Hasase
Lukkam
Homi
Lukkanti
Jivase
Hasamu
Nhằmu
Sayadi
Sayejja
Hasadha
******
3

Page #27

(D) Write all the alternative forms of the Present Tense of Verbs
given in brackets in agreement with the following Personal Pronouns. 1. Amhe (Hasa)
2. Tumaṁ (Saya) 3. So (Ņacca)
4. Ahaṁ (Rüsa) 5. Tumhe (Lukka)
6. Te (Jagga) 7. Vayam (Jiva)
8. Så (Ņha) 9. Tá (Tha)
10. Tujjhe (Ho) 11. Amhe (Lukka)
12. Tão (Rüsa) 13. Haṁ (sacca)
14. So (Jagga) 15. Tuha (Jiva)
16. Amhe (wha) 17. Ta (Ho)
18. Tubbhe (Saya) 19. Tume (Lukka)
20. Tumhe (Rusa) 21. Vayam (Nacca)
22. Ammi (Jagga) 23. So (Jiva)
24. Tum (Nha) 25. Tubbhe (Ho)
26. Tầu (Tha) 27. Tujjhe (Hasa)
28. Tume (Tha) 29. Te (Saya)
30. Sa (Hasa)
Example:
1. Amhe
Hasamo/Hasamu/Hasama.
(E) Point out the Person, Number, Original Verb and the Suffixes
in the following Verbal forms of the Present Tense. 1. Ņaccanti 2. Sayasi
3. Rūsai 4. Jaggam 5. Sayittha
6. Naccati 7. Rúsami 8. Lukkanti 9. Hasase 10. Thadi
11. Nhạmu 12. Sayase 13. Jivaha
14. Rüsante 15. Jaggesi 16. Jivase
17. Lukkami 18. Hasedi
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #28

19. Homa
22. Nhāmi
25. Naccasi
28. Hosi
31. Jivae
34. Rūseti
Examples.
20. Naccam
23. Hasadha
26. Hoitthä
29. Thāmu
32. Naccae
35. Lukkaṁ
Person
1. Naccanti
Third Person
4. Jaggam First Person
Number
Präkrta Exercise Book
Plural
Singular
21. Jivati
24. Hasante
27. Lukkire
30. Jaggemi
33. Jivade
36. Hasati
Original
Verb
Nacca
Jagga
Example -
1. First Person Nominative Plural Amhe/Vayam
(F) Write forms of the Personal Pronoun expressed by the
following.
1. First Person Nominative Plural
2. Second Person Nominative Plural
3. Third Person Nominative Plural (Masculine)
4. First Person Nominative Singular
5. Third Person Nominative Singular (Masculine)
6. Second Person Nominative Singular
7. Third Person Nominative Plural (Feminine)
8. Third Person Nominative Singular (Feminine)
Suffix

nti
5

Page #29

(G) Point out the Person, Case, Number and Gender in the following Personal Pronouns.
1. Amhe
2. Te
4. Vayam
5. Tumam
7. Aham
8. Tujjhe
10. Să
Example -
1. Amhe
6

11. Ham
3. Tubbhe
6. So
9. Tão
12. Tuha
Person
Case
Number
First Person Nominative Plural

Gender
All the three Genders
Präkrta Exercise Book

Page #30

Exercise 2
(A) Translate the following sentences into Prākṛta. Write all the alternatives of the inflected Personal Pronouns and the Verbal forms.
1. They both should/may dance. 2. We all should/may sleep. 3. He should/may laugh. 4. You all should/may live. 5.I should/ may sulk. 6. You should/may hide. 7. They both should/may wake up. 8. They all should/may stay. 9. He/ She should/may become. 10. You both should/may laugh. 11. We all should/may dance. 12. I should/may bathe. 13. You should/may sulk. 14. They all should/may hide. 15. He should/may sleep. 16. I should/may wake up. 17. They all should/may live. 18. He should/may bathe. 19. I should/may stay. 20. You all should/may become. 21. They all should/may laugh. 22. You should/may dance. 23. He should/ may hide. 24. You should/may wake up. 25. They all should/may sulk. 26. I should/may live. 27. You all should/may sleep. 28. We all should/may stay. 29. They all should/may become. 30. They both should/may stay. 31. I should/may laugh. 32. You both should/may dance. 33. We all should/may hide. 34. She should/may sulk. 35. We all should/may wake up. 36. I should/ may sleep. 37. She should/may live. 38. You should/may stay. 39. We all should/may bathe. 40. I should/may become. 41. He should/may dance. 42. You should/may laugh. 43. I should/may hide. 44. They all should/may sleep. 45. We all should/may laugh. 46. You both should/may wake up. 47. They all should/may sulk. 48. She should/may stay. 49. You all should/may stay. 50. You should/may bathe. 51. We both should/may sulk. 52. You all should/may hide. 53. I should/may dance. 54. You all should/ may sulk. 55. He should/may wake up 56. You should/may sleep. 57. You should/may live. 58. You both should/may stay. 59. You all should/may bathe. 60. We all should/may become.
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 2, study lessons 9 to 16 of "Prākṛta Grammar and Composition".
Prakrta Exercise Book

7

Page #31

Examples :1. They both should/ =Te/Ta Naccantu/Naccentu.
may dance 9. He/She should/ - So/Så Hou/Hodu.
may become 22. You should/ - Tumam/ Naccahi/Naccasu/Naccadhi/ may dance Tus/ Naccehi/Naccesu/Ņaccedhi/
Tuha Nacca/Naccejjasu/Naccejjahi/
Naccejje. 31. I should/
= Ahaṁ/ Hasamu/Hasamu/ may laugh
Haṁ) Hasimu/Hasemu.
Ammi 49. You all should/ - Tumhel Thāha/ may stay
Tujjhel Thadha.
Tubbhe 60. We all should/ - Amhel Homo.
may become Vayam
(B) Translate the following sentences into Prákệta according to
the rules given in the footnotes of the lessons 9 to 16 of “Praksta Grammar and Composition". Lesson - 9 Rule (3) (ii) 1. I should live. 2. I should laugh. 3. I should hide. 4. I should wake up. 5. I should dance. Lesson - 10 Rule (2) (iii) 6. You should wake up. 7. You should sulk. 8. You should hide. 9. You should sleep. 10. You should live. Lesson • 11 Rule (2) (ii) 11. He should sleep. 12. He should sulk. 13. She should hide. 14. She should wake up. 15. He should live.
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #32

Lesson - 12 Rule (2) (i) 16. I should stay. 17. You should become. 18. He should bathe. 19. You should stay. 20. She should become. Lesson - 13 Rule (2) (ii) 21. We both should live. 22. We all should hide. 23. We both should dance. 24. We all should wake up. 25. We both should sulk. Lesson - 14. Rule (2) (ii) 26. You both should hide. 27. You all should sulk. 28. You both should wake up. 29. You all should live. 30. You all should dance. Lesson - 15 Rule (2) (ii) 31. They both should wake up. 32. They all should live. 33. They both should dance. 34. They all should sleep. 35. They both should laugh. Lesson - 16 Rule (6) (i) 36. We all should stay. 37. You all should become. 38. They all should bathe. 39. We all should become. 40. They all should stay. Examples : -
1.
I should live :
Jivejja/Jivejjami.
Aham/Ham/ Ammi
6. You should wake up : Tumam/Tur/ Jaggejjā/Jaggejjasi/
Tume
Jaggejjāhi. 11. He should sleep - So
Saye/Sayejja. 16. I should stay = Ahaṁ/Haṁ/ Thāejjā/Tháejjāmi.
Ammi 21. We both should live - Amhe/Vayaṁ Jivejjama. 26. You both
Tubbhel Lukkejjāha. should hide -
Tumhe/Tujjhe 31. They both should Te/Ta Jaggejjā.
wake up = 36. We all should stay - Amhe/Vayaṁ Thãejjāma.
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #33

(C) Write the inflected Personal Pronouns in agreement with the
Number of the following Verbal forms. 1. ...... Hasadhi 2. ...... Jaggeu
...... Hodu 4...... Sayamu 5. ...... Naccamo ...... Rūsaha
7. ...... Jivantu 8. ...... Hasemu ...... Lukkeha 10. ...... Jaggejjā 11. ...... Thamu 12. ...... Naccesu
....... Sayentu 14. ...... Ņhãejjaha ...... Hasāmo 16. ......Rüsahi 17. ...... Jivadha 18. ...... Ho
Hojjāma 19....... Lukkemo 20...... Nhamu
...... Jaggejjasu 22. ...... Sayemu 23. ...... Jivehi
...... Lukkau 25. ...... Ruse 26....... Thadu
...... Jaggemo 28. ...... Sayaha 29.... Naccantu ...... Hojjaha 31. ...... Sayamo 32........ Thaha
..... Lukkedha 34. ...... Nhāhi 35. .... Tháu
...... Rūsāmu 37 ....... Hosu 38. ..... Naccedu 39. ...... Jaggantu 40....... Nhantu . 41. ..... Sayejjāmi ...... Hasaha 43. ...... Ņhaha 44. ...... Jivadha
...... Lukkemu 46. ...... Homu 47. ..... Thamo
...... Naccejjahi 49. ...... Jaggejjāsi 50...... Sayeu
...... Jivejja 52. ...... Hasasu 53. ..... Nhāu 54. ...... Rūsentu 55. ...... Lukkedhi 56. ..... Thahi
Thămu ...... Rusa ...... Hojjā
...... Sayejjāhi 61. ...... Jaggau 62. ..... Hosu
...... Nahadhi 64....... Sayesu 65...... Homo 66. ...... Rūsamo 67....... Jaggimu 68. ..... Sayahi 69. ...... Hontu
ܠܓ
ܧ
ܨ
ܕ
Examples : - 1. Tumaṁ/Tum/Tuha 2. So/Sa 3. So/Sa
Hasadhi. Jaggeu. Hodu.
(D) Write all the alternative forms of the Imperative of Verbs given
in brackets in agreement with the following Personal Pronouns. 1. Tuha (Saya) 2. Haṁ (Rusa) 3. Tumhe (Lukka)
10
Praksta Exercise Book

Page #34

4. Amhe (Hasa) 7. Te (Jagga) 10. Tão (Thá) 13. Tur (Saya) 16. So (Jagga) 19. Tá (Nacca) 22. Amhe (Ņacca) 25. So (Jiva) 28. Te (Thảo
5. So (Ņacca) 6. Vayar (Jiva). 8. Să (Nha)
9. Tubbhe (Ho) 11. Tujjhe (Hasa) 12. Amhe (Lukka) 14. Ahar (Ņacca) 15. Tá (Rüsa) 17. Tumaṁ (Jiva) 18. Ammi (Ņha) 20. Tumaṁ (Saya) 21. Te (Lukka) 23. Tujjhe (Rúsa) 24. Haṁ (Jagga) 26. Tuha (Ņhå) 27. Amhe (Ho) 29. Tubbhe (Hasa) 30. Tāu (Nacca)
Example: 1. Tuha:
Sayahi/Sayasu/Sayadhi/Saya/ Sayejjasu/Sayejjahi/Sayejje.
(E) Point out the Person, Number, Original Verb and Suffixes in
the following Verbal forms of the Imperative.
1. Jivemu 4. Rūsamo 7. Lukkentu 10. Nhāsu 13. Lukka 16. Hou 19. Sayedha 22. Hojjama 25. Hoha 28. Sayejjasu 31. Homu 34. Hosu
2. Jaggau
3. Sayahi 5. Thẩhi
6. Naccaha 8. Hojjáha
9. Hasejja 11. Jaggamo 12. Sayeu 14. Naccemo 15. Rüsejjahi 17. Hasantu
18. Jivadu 20. Rúsentu
21. Lukkejjāsi 2 3. Thămo
24. Naccehi 26. Ņhadhi
27. Hasamu 29. Thãntu-Thantu 30. Jaggejje 32. Hasahi
33. Rüsesu 35. Lukkeha 36. Nhāejjāmi
Example: -
Person
Number
Suffix
Original Verb Jiva
1. Jivemu
First Person Singular
Mu
Prāksta Exercise Book
11

Page #35

Exercise 3 (A) Translate the following sentences into Praksta. Write all the
alternatives of the inflected Personal Pronouns and the Verbal forms. 1. He laughed. 2. They both danced. 3. You hid. 4. I sulked. 5. They both woke up. 6. We all slept. 7. You all lived. 8. They all stayed. 9. 1 bathed. 10. She became. 11. You both laughed. 12. We all danced. 13. They all hid. 14. You sulked. 15. I woke up. 16. He slept. 17. They all lived. 18. I stayed. 19. They (Fem.) all bathed. 20. You all became. 21. You danced. 22. They all laughed. 23. She hid. 24. They all sulked. 25. You woke up. 26. You all slept. 27. I lived. 28. We all stayed. 29. She bathed. 30. They (Fem.) both became. 31. I laughed. 32. You all slept. 33. We all hid. 34. She sulked. 35. We all woke up. 36. I slept. 37. She lived. 38. You stayed. 39. We both bathed. 40. I (Fem.) became. 41. You laughed. 42. He danced. 43. I hid. 44. We all sulked. 45. You both woke up. 46. Thye (Fem.) all slept. 47. We both lived. 48. She stayed. 49. You all stayed. 50. You bathed. 51. We all laughed. 52. I danced. 53. You both hid. 54. You all sulked. 55. She woke up. 56. You slept. 57. You lived. 58. You both stayed. 59. You both bathed. 60. You all became.
Examples :1. He laughed - 8. They all stayed :
27. I lived -
So
Hasia. (i) Ta/Tau/Tảo Thāsi/Thahi/Thahĩa. (ii) Te
Thắsi/Thihi/Thảhia. Aham/Haṁ/ Jivia. Ammi Amhe/Vayam Nhâsi/Nhāhi/
Nhāhia. Tumaṁ/Tum/ Sayia. Tuha
39. We both bathed :
56. You slept
-
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 3, study lessons 17 to 18 of "Prak’ta Grammar and Composition".
12
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #36

(B) Translate the following sentences into Prākṛta according to the rules given in the footnote of the lessons 17 to 18 of "Prākṛta Grammar and Composition".
Lesson 17 Rule (4)
1. I laughed. 2. You laughed. 3. He laughed. 4. We all hid. 5. You all lived. 6. Thye all sulked. 7. She woke up. 8. They all danced. 9. I slept. 10. I danced.
Lesson
18 Rule (4) (i)
-
11. I stayed. 12. We all became. 13. You bathed. 14. You all stayed. 15. They all bathed.
·
Examples: -
1. I laughed =
11.I stayed
......
1.
4.
7. Sayitthá
10.
Nhāhi
13.
Hoimsu
16. Sayia
Naccia
...... Lukkitthā
......
(C) Write the Personal Pronouns according to the number of the
following Verbal forms.
2.
=
Example : -
Aham/Ham/ Ammi
Aham/Ham/ Ammi
1. Amhe (Hasa) 4. Aham (Rūsa) 7. Vayam (Jiva) Präkrta Exercise Book

5.......
8.......
11.
14.
17.
......
1. Aham/Amhe/Tumam/Tumhe/So/Te
Rūsia
Jaggia
Thāhia
Nhäsi
Nhāhia
Hohia
Hasittha/Hasimsu.
Thaittha/Thāimsu.
2. Tumam (Saya) 5. Tumhe (Lukka) 8. Să (Nhā)
3.......
6....
9.
12.
15.
18.
(D) Write all the alternatives of the Verbal forms of the Past Tense to be formed from the Verbs given in brackets according to
the following Personal Pronouns.
Jivia
Thāsi
Hosi
Hohi
Hasia
...... Lukkia
Naccia.

3. So (Nacca) 6. Te (Jagga) 9. Tā (Tha)
13

Page #37

10. Tubbhe (Ho) 13. Tă (Nacca) 16. Tuha (Jiva) 19. Ammi (Lukka) 22. Ahar (Jagga) 25. Vayam (Ho) 28. Te (Saya)
11. Tuṁ (Lukka) 14. Să (Jagga) 17. Te (Ho) 20. Tumhe (Rūsa) 23. So (Jiva) 26. Ta (Tha) 29. Ammi (Lukka)
12. Haṁ (Rusa) 15. Ammi (Nhà) 18. Tujjhe (Saya) 21. Amhe (Nacca) 24. Tuha (Ņha) 27. Tubbhe (Hasa) 30. Tumam (Rüsa)
Examples :. 1. Amhe Hasia/Hasitthå/ Hasińsu.
Ņhasi/Ņháhi/Ņhähia/Ņháitthå/Ņhäissu.
(E) Point out the Person, Number, Original Verb and Suffix in each
of the following Verbs representing the Past Tense.
1. Naccia 4. Rusia
7. Nhāhia 10. Jivimsu 13. Sayia 16. Hasia 19. Jivia
2. Thāhi 5. Hohi
8. Jaggińsu 11. Thāsi 14. Nhāhi 17. Jaggia 20. Thāhia
3. Hasitthā 6. Lukkia
9. Hoitthā 12. Thäittha 15. Nhãi su 18. Hosi 21. Nhāsi
Example -
Person
Number
Suffix
Original Verb Ņacca -
1. Ņaccia
ia
First Person Second Person Third Person
Singular Plural
14
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #38

Exercise 4 (A) Translate the following sentences into Prakṣta. Write all the
alternatives of the inflected Personal Pronouns and the Verbal forms. 1. You all will live. 2. They both will dance. 3. We all shall sleep. 4. He will laugh. 5. I shall sulk. 6. You will hide. 7. They both will wake up. 8. They all will stay. 9. He will become. 10. You both will laugh. 11. We all will dance. 12. I shall bathe. 13. You will sulk. 14. They all will hide. 15. He will sleep. 16. I shall wake up. 17. They all will live. 18. He will bathe. 19. I shall stay. 20. You all will become. 21. They all will laugh. 22. You will dance. 23. He will hide. 24. You will wake up. 25. They all will sulk. 26. I shall live. 27. You all will sleep. 28. We both shall stay. 29. They all will become. 30. They both will stay. 31. I shall laugh. 32. You both will dance. 33. We all shall hide. 34. He will sulk. 35. We all shall wake up. 36. I shall sleep. 37. He will live. 38. You will stay. 39. I shall become. 40. He will wake up. 41. You will laugh. 42.1 shall hide. 43. We all shall bathe. 44. They all will sleep. 45. We all shall laugh. 46. You both will wake up. 47. They all will sulk. 48. He will stay. 49. You all will stay. 50. You will bathe. 51. We both shall sulk. 52. You all will hide. 53. I shall dance. 54. You all will sulk. 55. He will dance. 56. You will sleep. 57. You will live. 58. You will become. 59. You all will bathe. 60. We all shall live.
Examples :1. You all will live -
Tubbhe/Tumhe/ Tujjhe
Jivihiha/Jivihidha/Jivihitthă/ Jivissaha/Jivissadha/Jīvissaitthă/ Jivissiha/Jīvissidha/Jivissiitthả.
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 4, study lessons 19 to 26 of “Pråksta Grammar and Composition”.
Prakrta Exercise Book
15

Page #39

8. They all will stay = (i) Tá/Tão/
Tāu (ii) Te
Thahinti/Thāhinte/Thāhire Or Thāhiire/Thassanti/Thāssante/ Thāssaire/Thâssinti/Thăssintel Thâssiire.
18. He will bathe :
So
Nhihii/Nhahidi/Nhässai/ Nhassadi/Nhâssidi.
22. You will dance :
Tumaṁ/Tur/ Tuha
Naccihisi/Naccihise/Naccissasi/ Ņaccissase/Naccissisi/Ņaccissise.
39.1 shall become :
Aham/Ham/ Ammi
Hohimi/Hohami/Hossāmi/ Hossimi/Hossam.
51. We both shall sulk =
Amhe/Vayam
Rūsihimo/Rusihimu/Rūsihima/ Rūsissāmo/Rūsissämu/Rūsissāma/ Rūsissimo/Rūsissimu/Rūsissima/ Rusihamo/Rūsihāmu/Rūsihāma.
(B) Translate the following sentences into Prākļta according to
the rules given in the footnotes of lessons 19 to 26 of "Prākşta Grammar and Composition". Lesson • 19 Rule (2) (iv) 1. I shall weep. 2. We shall weep. 3. You will weep. 4. You all will weep. 5. He/She will weep. 6. They will weep. Lesson - 19 Rule (2) (v) 1. I shall weep. 2. We shall weep. 3. You will weep. 4. You all will weep. 5. He/She will weep. 6. They will weep.
16
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #40

wwwNNN money
(C) Write all the alternatives of the inflected Personal Pronouns
in agreement with the following Verbal forms. 1........ Jivissanti 2....... Hasihisi 3. ...... Sayissimu 4. ...... Jaggihise 5. ..... Rūsissisi 6. ...... Sayissante 7. ....... Lukkihāmo 8. ...... Sayissāmu 9. ...... Rūsihimo
...... Naccissinti 11...... Thāssam 12. ...... Lukkissadha ...... Nhássáma 14. ... Jivissami 15. ...... Jaggissisi
Sayissidi 17. ...... Hohāmi 18. ...... Naccihāmo 19. ...... Rusissaha 20. ...... Lukkissanti 21. ...... Nhāhimo
Jivissase 23. ....... Lukkissai 24. ...... Thassidi 25. ...... Hasihimu 26. Jivissaittha 27. ...... Jaggissante
Ņhāhāmu 29. ...... Ņaccissaṁ 30. ...... Rūsissasi .... Sayissadi 32. ...... Jivissade
...... Hossaha Sayihāmo 35. ...... Jaggissiire 36. ...... Rūsihāmi ...... Hasissadha 38. ..... Lukkissasi ...... Naccissase
Sayisside 41. ..... Jaggissima 42. ... Rūsihidha ...... Jivissāmu 44. ..... Hasihinte 45. ...... Lukkissiitthā 46. ...... Thassasi 47. ..... Hossima 48. ..... Rusihise 49.... Jivissanti 50. Nhássaba 51... Naccissai 52. ...... Hasissae 53. ..... Lukkissimu 54. ...... Sayissiha 55. ...... Jaggissinti 56. ..... Hohidi 57. ...... Naccihinte 58. ...... Ņhāhiha 59. ..... Thāssadi 60. ...... Jīvissai
Examples: - 1. Te/Ta 2. Tumam/Tum/Tuha 3. Amhe/Vayam
Jivissanti. Hasihisi. Sayissimu.
(D) Write all the alternatives of the Verbal forms of the Future
Tense to be formed from the Verbs given in brackets according to the following Personal Pronouns. 1. Amhe (Hasa) 2. Tumam (Saya) 3. So (Ņacca) 4. Ahaṁ (Rusa) 5. Tumhe (Lukka) 6. Te (Jagga)
7. Vayam (Jiva) 8. Să (Ņha) 9. Tà (Tha) 10. Amhe (Lukka) 11. Ham (Ņacca) 12. Tuha (Jiva)
Prakrta Exercise Book
17

Page #41

13. Tă (Ho)
16. So (Jiva)
19. Te (Saya)
22. So (Jagga) 25. Tumhe (Rusa) 28. Tău (Tha)
Example: . 1. Amhe
1. Naccissinti
4. Jaggissāmi
7. Rúsessam
10. Thassadi 13. Jivissiha
16. Jivissise
19. Hossima 22. Nhassam 25. Naccissasi 28. Hohisi
(E) Point out the Person, Number, Original Verb and Suffix in the following Verbal forms of the Future Tense.
Example -
14. Te (Lukka) 17. Tubbhe (Ho)
20. Tujjhe (Ho) 23. Amhe (Nhȧ) 26. Ammi (Jagga) 29. Te (Tha)
18

Hasihimo/Hasihimu/Hasihima/Hasissȧmo/
Hasissämu/Hasissȧma/Hasissimo/Hasissimu/ Hasissima/Hasihȧmo/Hasihāmu/Hasihāma.
2. Sayihisi
5. Sayissaitthā
8. Lukkihinti
11. Nhāhāmu
14. Lukkissāmo
17. Lukkissāma
20. Naccissae
23. Hasissadha 26. Hossiitthā
29. Thāhāmu
Person
15. Vayam (Nacca) 18. Tujjhe (Hasa) 21. Tão (Rūsa) 24. Tubbhe (Saya) 27. Tum (Nhȧ)
30. Tumhe (Hasa)
Number
1. Naccissinti Third Person Plural
3. Rūsissai
6. Jivissae
9. Hasissase
12. Sayissase
15. Jaggissasi
18. Hasissadi
21. Jivissade
24. Rūsissante
27. Lukkissaire
30. Hasissinti
Original Suffix
Verb
Nacca

ssi+nti
Präkrta Exercise Book

Page #42

ན,
Exercise 5
(A) Translate the following sentences into Präkṛta. Write all the alternatives of the inflected Personal Pronouns and the Verbal forms.
1. I endeavour. 2. He quarrels. 3. You tire. 4. They flounder. 5. You all embarrass. 6. We all fall. 7. They both weep. 8. You both fear. 9. We both tremble. 10. I die. 11. They fight. 12. He faints. 13. You jump. 14. We all endeavour. 15. They both play. 16. You all wake up. 17. We both go round. 18. They all leap. 19. You (Fem.) all rejoice. 20. She sits. 21. I tire. 22. They all fight. 23. We all fear. 24. You tremble. 25. They (Fem.) both embarrass. 26. You both endeavour. 27. We both sit. 28. You all quarrel. 29. We all faint. 30. 1 (Fem.) flounder. 31. You should embarrass. 32. I should sit. 33. He should/may fear. 34. You both should/may leap. 35. We both should/may play. 36. They both should/may get up. 37. You all should/may leap. 38. We all should/may go round. 39. They all should/may jump. 40. You should/may endeavour. 41. He should/may tire. 42. I should/may fall. 43. You all should/may flounder. 44. We both should/may endeavour. 45. They all should/may rejoice. 46. You both should/ may faint. 47. They both should/may tremble. 48. We all should/ may die. 49. He should/may play. 50. You all should/may fight. 51. He should/may sit. 52. You both should/may get up. 53. I should/may jump. 54. We all should/may rejoice. 55. You all should/may endeavour. 56. They both should/may leap. 57. We both should/may get up. 58. You both should/may embarrass. 59. They all should/may fear. 60. He should/may go round. Examples: -
1. I endeavour = Aham/Ham/
Ammi
Präkrta Exercise Book

Ujjamami/Ujjamāmi/
Ujjamemi.
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 5, study lesson 27 of "Prākṛta Grammar and Composition".

19

Page #43

15. They both play = Te
Khelanti/Khelante/Khelire/Khelenti. 28. You all quarrel = Tubbhe/Tumhe/
Kalahaha/Kalahadha/ Tujjhe
Kalahitthă/Kalaheha/
Kalahedha/Kalaheitthă. 31. You should embarrass = Tumaṁ/Tum/Tuha Lajjahi/Lajjasu/Lajjadhi/
Lajja/Lajjehi/Lajjesu/ Lajjedhi/Lajjejjasu/
Lajjejjahi/Lajjejje. 41. He should/may tire : So/Sã
Thakkau/Thakkeu/
Thakkadu/Thakkedu. 54. We all should/may rejoice = Amhe/Vayam
Vllasamo/Ullasāmo/
Ullasemo. (B) Translate the following sentences in Präkệta in agreement
with the rules given in footnotes of lessons 1 to 26 of “Prakrta Grammar and Composition". 1. I laugh. 2. You wake up. 3. He stays. 4. We all live. 5. You all sulk. 6. They all wake up. 7. I should wake up. 8. You should sleep. 9. He should hide. 10. We all should dance. 11. You all should stay. 12. They all should live. 13. I woke up. 14. You laughed. 15. He hid. 16. We all should live. 17. You all hid. 18. They all slept. 19. They all will wake up. 20. I become. 21. You bathe. 22. We all become. 23. You all stay. 24. They all bathe. 25. We all should stay. 26. You all should bathe. 27. I stayed. 28. You became. 29. He bathed. Examples : - 1. I laugh : Aham/Ham/ Ammi
Hasaṁ. 8. You should : Tumam/Tus/ Sayejjă/Sayejjäsi/ sleep Tume
Sayejjáhi.
20
Prākrta Exercise Book

Page #44

15. He hid - So 23. You all stay - Tubbhe/Tumhel
Tujjhe 28. You became = Tumaṁ/Tuṁ/
Tume
Lukkitthă/Lukkimsu. Thājja/Thājjă/ Thiejja/Thằejja. Hoitthā/Hoińsu/ Hotthā.
6.
(C) Write the inflected Personal Pronouns in agreement with the
Number of the following Verbal forms. 1. ...... Lajjamu 2...... Ruvittha 3. ...... Darante 4. ...... Kalahai 5. ...... Thakkadu ...... Acchire 7. ...... Padamu 8. ...... Utthadha ...... Tadaphadasi 10. ...... Ghumei 11. ...... Nhāsi
...... Ucchalanti 13. ...... Ujjamamu 14. ...... Ullasadi 15....... Kampae 16. ...... Maremi 17. ...... Khelante 18. ...... Kullamo 19. ...... Jujjhase 20....... Mucchesi 21. ...... Lajjadhi 22. ...... Acchedhi 23. ...... Thakkittha 24....... Ruvami 25...... Kalahahi 26....... Daredi 27....... Padama 28. ...... Utthanti 29....... Tadaphadami 30....... Ghumeha 31. ....... Mucchamu 32. ...... Jujjhejjahi 33....... Kullade 34. ...... Khelamo 35. ...... Maredha 36. ...... Kampantu 37 ....... Ullasemu 38. ...... Ujjamejje ...... Ucchalau ....... Thadi 41....... Ghumeha 42....... Tadaphadentu
. Užthejjasu 44. ...... Padamu 45. ...... Acchedu 46. ....... Thakkejje 47........ Kalahaha
...... Darantu 49. ......
Ruvemo 50. ...... Lajjahi 51. ...... Homi 52. ...... Kalaheu 53. ...... Jujjheha 54. ...... Ullasentu 55. ...... Khelehi 56...... Darāmo 57....... Ghumasu 58. ...... Lajjaha 59....... Daresu 60....... Tadaphadimu
43. ......
Examples :1. Aham/Ham/Ammi 2. Tubbhe/Tumhe/Tujjhe 3. TelTa
Lajjamu. Ruvittha. Darante.
21
Pråksta Exercise Book

Page #45

(D) Write all the alternative forms of the Present Tense and the
Imperative of Verbs given in brackets in agreement with the following Personal Pronouns. Present Tense
Imperative 1. Amhe (Jujjha)
16. Amhe (Tadaphada) 2. Tuha (Ucchala)
17. Tău (Kalaha) 3. So (Kulla)
18. Tujjhe (Ghuma) 4. Ham (Ruva)
19. Te (Dara) 5. Tumhe (Khela) 20. Tum (Ujjama) 6. Te (Dara)
21. Să (Ujjama) 7. Vayam (Lajja)
22. Aham (Ullasa) 8. Sā (Kalaha)
23. Tujjhe (Kampa) 9. Tā (Pada)
24. Ammi (Kampa) 10. Tubbhe (Thakka) 25. Ahaṁ (Pada) 11. Tão (Tadaphada) 26. Tão (Muccha) 12. Tă (Accha)
27. Ammi (Khela) 13. Haṁ (Kampa)
28. Tāu (Kulla) 14. So (Uttha)
29. Tubbhe (Ucchala) 15. Tuha (Mara)
30. Tumam (Ullasa)
Examples: 1. Amhe Jujjhamo/Jujjhámo/Jujjhimo/Jujjhemo/
Jujjhamu/Jujjhåmu/Jujjhimu/Jujjhemu/
Jujjhama/Jujjháma/Jujjhima/Jujjhema. 16. Amhe Tadaphaờamo/Tadaphađamo/Tadaphademo.
22
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #46

(E) Point out the Person, Number, Original Verb, Suffix and Tense (Present Tense or Imperative) in each of the following Verbal
forms.
1. Darahi
4. Acchedha
7. Ucchalasi
10. Khelaha
13. Mucchesi
16. Ghumantu
19. Lajjase
Example:
1. Darahi

Person
Second Person
Präkrta Exercise Book
2. Kalahaha
5. Taḍaphaḍau
8. Ullasamo
11. Kullāmi
14. Lajjamu
17. Padamu
20. Kullade
3. Thakkai
6. Marami
9. Kampedu
12. Jujjhanti
15. Ruvadi
18. Ujjamadhi
Number Original Suffix Tense
Verb
Singular Dara

hi
Imperative
23

Page #47

Exercise 6
(A) Translate the following sentences into Prakrta. Write all the
alternatives of the inflected Personal Pronouns and the Verbal forms.
1. You both should/may rejoice. 2. They all weep. 3. I sit. 4. We both fear. 5. He laughs. 6. You all should/may sleep. 7. They all embarrass. 8. You flounder. 9.1 (Fem.) wake up. 10. We all should/ may stay. 11. She trembles. 12. You should/may bathe. 13. You all should/may dance. 14. They both die. 15. We both die. 16. You should/may go round. 17. He stays. 18. I sulk. 19. We all should/may endeavour. 20. You all should/may play. 21. He should/may hide. 22. They all live. 23. You jump. 24. I should/ may leap. 25We all should/may sleep. 26. You both tire. 27. He should/may get up. 28. They both quarrel. 29. I (Fem.) fight. 30. We both faint. 31. He quarrels. 32. We all should/may stay. 33. You all weep. 34. They all should/may sit. 35. We both should/may wake up. 36. They all fear. 37. I should/may laugh. 38. He falls. 39. You embarrass. 40. You should/may jump. 41. They both flounder. 42. I bathe. 43. You all endeavour. 44. You all should/may laugh. 45. She dies. 46. They all should/ may become. 47. She dances. 48. I go round. 49. You should/ may endeavour. 50. She plays. 51. You all should/may hide. 52. They all faint. 53. He/She should/may rejoice. 54. You all should/may get up. 55. I should/may jump. 56. They all quarrel. 57. We both should/may live. 58. You all should/may sit. 59. We all rejoice. 60. They all should/may go round.
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 6, study lessons 1 to 16of "Pråkrta Grammar and Composition”.
24
Prákrta Exercise Book

Page #48

Examples: - 1. You both should/may rejoice -
Tubbhe/Tumhe/Tujjhe
Ullasaha/Ullaseha/ Ullasadha/Ullasedha/ Ullasejjāha.
9. I wake up -
Aham/Ham/Ammi
Jaggami/Jaggami/Jaggemi/ Jaggam/Jaggejja/Jaggejja.
19. We all should/may endeavour :
Amhe/Vayam
Ujjamamo/Ujjamāmo/ Ujjamemo/Ujjamejjāma.
40. You should/may jump =
Tumam/Tum/Tuha
Kullahi/Kullasu/ Kulladhi/Kulla/ Kullehi/Kullesu/ Kulledhi/Kullejjasu/ Kullejjahi/Kullejje.
53. He/She should/may rejoice :
So/Sā
Ullasau/Ullasadu/Ullaseu/ Ullasedu/Ullase/Ullasejja.
60. They all should/may go round -
Te/Tā/Tàu/Tão
Ghumantu/Ghumentul Ghumejjā.
(B) Translate the following sentences into Prākṣta in agreement
with the rules given in footnotes of lessons 1 to 16 of "Prākşta Grammar and Composition". 1. You hide. 2. I wake up. 3. He laughs. 4. We all stay. 5. You all bathe. 6. They all become. 7. I should laugh. 8. You should wake up. 9. He should sulk. 10. We all should hide. 11. They all should become.
Praksta Exercise Book
25

Page #49

Example :
1. You hide =
(C) Write the Personal Pronouns in agreement with the following
Verbal forms.
1.
Hasāmo
4. Lajjaha
7.
Khelai
10.
Jivasi
13. Darami
16.
19.
22.
25.
28.
31.
34.
37.
40.
43.
46.
49.
52.
55.
58. Thādu
******
26
......
******
......
......
......
******
*****
2. ....... Kullahi
5.
8.
11.
14.
Jaggitthä 17. Ucchalāmi 20.
Tumam/Tum/Tume Lukkasi/Lukkase/Lukkesi.
Kampei
Sayesu
Thai
Kalahanti
Sayamu
Jujjhadha 23.
Ujjamentu
Thakkamo 26.
Pademi
29.
Rūsasu
32.
Kulleu
35.
....... Jaggamu
38. Utthaha
41. Padae
44.
47.
50.
Lukkamu 53.
Ghumemo 56.
59.
Lajjadi
Khela
Ullasami
Jujjhire
Nhāmi

......
......
Utthentu
Ullaseha
Homa
Nhāhi
......
Examples: -
1. Amhe/Vayam
Hasāmo.
2. Tumam/Tum/Tuha Kullahi.
3. Aham/Ham/Ammi Naccamu.
3. Naccamu
6. Thāmu
9.
Ruvau
12.
Acchade
15.
Mucchanti
18. Ghuma
21.
Lukkaha
24.
Taḍaphaḍase
27.
******

......
Marasi
30... Marante
33.
Hasemu
36.
Naccejjasu
39.
Hou
42.
Acchantu
Tadaphadei 45. Kampaha Ujjama
48.
Ullasadu
Ucchaledu
51.
Thakkahi
54.
Mucchasi 57.
Hasesu
60.
******
......
......
Jivaha
Darentu
Kalahadha
Rüsemo
Präkṛta Exercise Book

Page #50

(D) Write all the alternative forms of the Present Tense (Pre.) and
the Imperative (Imp.) of Verbs given in brackets as directed in agreement with the following Personal Pronouns. Present Tense
Imperative 1. Amhe (Hasa)
16. So (Ruva) 2. So (Kulla)
17. Aham (Lukka) 3. Tuha (Ujjama)
18. Tujjhe (Ho) 4. Te (Ullasa)
19. Amhe (Khela) 5. Haṁ (Kampa)
20. Tuha (Ņha) 6. Tumhe (Jiva)
21. Te (Ghuma) 7. Tubbhe (Tha)
22. Tão (Rusa) 8. Să (Ņacca)
23. So (Mara) 9. Amhe (Ullasa)
24. Vayam (Jagga) 10. Tā (Lajja)
25. Tâu (para) 11. So (Tadaphada) 26. Tumam (Thakka) 12. Tum (Saya)
27. Te (Accha) 13. Tujjhe (Kalaha)
28. Tumhe (Pada) 14. Te (Ucchala)
29. Ammi (Jujjha) 15. Sá (Uttha)
30. Tuṁ (Muccha)
Examples: - 1. Amhe Hasamo/Hasamu/Hasama. 16. So Ruvau/Ruveu/Ruvadu/Ruvedu.
(E) Point out the Person, Number, Original Verb, Suffix and Tense
(Present (Pre.)Or Imperative (Imp.) ) in each of the following Verbal forms. 1. Hasaha 2. Acchahi
3. Lajjai 4. Ghumami 5. Uttha
6. Kheladha
Praksta Exercise Book
27

Page #51

9. Lukkasu 12. Jaggadu 15. Rūsemi 18. Sayeha
7. Ullasentu 10. Jivasu 13. Jujjhadi 16. Kampasi 19. Ujjamemu 22. Ucchalitthà 26. Homa 28. Tadaphadeha
8. Lajjamo 11. Padami 14. Thāsu 17. Tadaphadae 20. Mucchesi 23. Naccanti 26. Ruvante 29. Ņaccamu
21. Kullemo
24. Nhâire 27. Lukkadhi 30. Lajjau.
Example :
Person
Number Original Suffix Tense
Verb Plural Hasa ha Imp.
1. Hasaha
Second
Person
28
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #52

(A) Translate the following sentences into Prākṛta. Write all the alternatives of the inflected Personal Pronouns and the Verbal forms.
1. You will dance. 2. He will stay. 3. You all will sleep. 4. She will laugh. 5. We all shall wake up. 6. I shall live. 7. They (Fem.) all will stay. 8. You all will become. 9. You will sulk. 10. We all shall bathe. 11. You both will live. 12. We all shall sleep. 13. They all will laugh. 14. He will wake up. 15. We shall embarrass. 16. They will fight. 17. You will play. 18. She will get up. 19. They all will rejoice. 20. She will go round. 21. He will flounder. 22. They all will weep. 23. They both will tremble. 24. He will die. 25. You will sit. 26. You all will fall. 27. They all will jump. 28. He will rejoice. 29. You all will endeavour. 30. He will hide.
Example: -
1. You will dance =
Tumam/Tum/Tuha
Exercise 7
10. We all shall bathe = Amhe/ Vayam

Naccihisi/Naccihise/ Naccissasi/Naccissase/ Naccissisi/Naccissise.
Nhāhimo/Nhâhimu/Nhāhima/
Nhässämo/Nhässämu/Nhāssāma/
Nhässimo/Nhassimu/Nhässima/ Nhāhāmo/Nhāhāmu/Nhāhāma.
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 7, study lessons 19 to 26 of Prākṛta Grammar and Composition".
Prakrta Exercise Book

29

Page #53

22. They all will weep :
Те
Ruvihinti/Ruvihinte/Ruvihiire/ Ruvissanti/Ruvissante/Ruvissaire/ Ruvissinti/Ruvissinte/Ruvissiire.
(B) Write all the alternatives of the Personal Pronouns in
agreement with the Number of the following Verbal forms.
5. ...... Nhas
1. ...... Hasissasi 2........ Lajjissima 3. ...... Khelissidi 4. ..... Jivissāmi 5. ....... Darissaha 6. ...... Jaggissante 7. ...... Ucchalissise 8. ...... Jujjhissāmo 9. ...... Thakkisside
...... Kampihimi 11. ...... Sayissiha 12. ...... Thāssanti 13. ...... Lajjihisi 14. ...... Khelissāmu 15. ...... Hasihinti
...... Jujjhihāmi 17. ..... Ņhassidi 18. ...... Lukkissiire ... Ghumihise 20. ...... Ullassisāmi 21. ...... Kullihidi
Utthissími 23. ...... Ullasissiittha 24. ...... Hohinte
Nhâssisi 26. ...... Kalahihimu 27. ...... Sayissai 28. ..... Ujjamissam 29. ...... Padissidha 30.. ...... Rūsihinti
Kullissisi 32. ...... Jaggissasi 33. ...... Utthihāmo
Padissae 35. ... Tadaphadissimi 36. ...... Ujjamissam 37 .... Ucchalissai 38. ...... Thakkihise 39. ...... Mucchissima 40... Hasihinti 41. .... Naccihiha 42. ...... Thāhisi 43. ...
Ruvihimo 44. ...... Acchihii 45. ...... Mucchissimu Ghumissidha 47. ...Tadaphadissise 48. ...... Marihina . Marihimu
...... Ņaccissāmi Hohinti 53. ...... Acchissaittha 54. ...... Kampissasi
Ullasihima 56. ...... Jivihide 57. ...... Darihami ...... Kalahissai 59. ...... Rūsihinti 60. ...... Nhășsami
WWWNNN
Anoman Oromoo woo
u un um
Examples : - 1. Tumam/Tum/Tuha
Hasissasi.
Lajjissima.
2. Amhe/Vayam 3. So/Sa
Khelissidi
30
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #54

(C) Write all the alternative forms of the Future Tense of Verbs given in brackets in agreement with the following Personal Pronouns.
1. Amhe (Hasa)
3. Tuha (Ujjama)
5. Ham (Kampa)
7. Tumhe (Tha)
9. Vayam (Ullasa)
11. So (Taḍaphaḍa)
13. Tujjhe (Kalaha)
15. Să (Uṭṭha)
17. Aham (Lukka)
19. Amhe (Khela)
21. Te (Ghuma)
23. So (Mara)
25. Så (Dara)
27. Te (Accha)
29. Ammi (Jujjha)
Example: - 1. Amhe
1. Ghumissāmi
4. Hasissämu 7. Lukkissasi
2. So (Kulla)
4. Te (Lajja)
6. Tubbhe (Jiva)
8. Să (Nacca)
10. Tão (Lajja)
12. Turn (Saya)
14. Te (Ucchala)
16. So (Ruva)
18. Tumhe (Ho)
20. Tumam (Nhȧ)
Präkrta Exercise Book

22. Tău (Rūsa)
24. Amhe (Jagga)
26. Tuha (Thakka)
Hasihimo/Hasihimu/Hasihima/Hasissȧmo/
Hasissämu/Hasissäma/Hasissimo/Hasissimu/
Hasissima/Hasihāmo/Hasihāmu/Hasihāma.
(D) Pick out the Person, Number, Original Verb and Suffix in the
following Verbal forms.
28. Tujjhe (Paḍa)
30. Tumam (Muccha)
2. Lajjissai
5. Acchissisi
8. Khelissam
3. Ullasissanti
6. Utthissaha
9. Jīvissae

31

Page #55

10. Paḍihimi
13. Thassasi
16. Tadaphaḍihie 19. Mucchihiha
22. Naccissinti
25. Ruvihimo
28. Kalahihisi
Example: .
11. Jaggissadha
14. Rüsissāmo
32

17. Sayissaitthā
20. Kullihami
23. Nhässaha
26. Lukkihittha
29. Nhassami
Person
1. Ghumissāmi "First Person
12. Jujjhihinti
15. Kampissinte
18. Ujjamissimu
21. Ucchalihitthā
24. Hossȧmi
27. Darihima
30. Thähii
Number Original Suffix
Verb
Singular Ghuma

ssǎ + mi
Präkrta Exercise Book

Page #56

Exercise 8
(A) Translate the following sentences into Präkṛta. Write all the alternatives of the inflected Personal Pronouns and the Verbal forms.
1. I should/may laugh. 2. 1 jump. 3. I shall endeavour. 4. You both should/may sit. 5. You all should/may tremble. 6. You all will live. 7. He stays. 8. She dances. 9. He will rejoice. 10. We all should/may sleep. 11. We all embarrass. 12. We all shall hide. 13. You should/may leap. 14. You flounder. 15. You tremble. 16. They all should/may get up. 17. They all weep. 18. They all will become. 19. I played. 20. I bathe. 21. I shall go round. 22. You all should/may wake up. 23. You all sulk. 24. You all will die. 25. He woke up. 26. She fears. 27. He tired. 28. We all sat. 29. We all fall. 30. We all faint. 31. I shall laugh. 32. I should/ may jump. 33. You all will sit. 34. They all tremble. 35. He should/ may live. 36. You should/may stay. 37. They all should/may dance. 38. You all should/may rejoice. 39. We all shall sleep. 40. They all will embarrass. 41. I should/may hide. 42. He flounders. 43. They both quarrel. 44. You should/may get up. 45. She weeps. 46. We all shall become. 47. You all should/may play. 48. They all should/may bathe. 49. I should/may go round. 50. You wake up. 51. She sulked. 52. They both die. 53. I shall sit. 54. You all tire. 55. I shall fear. 56. They all fell. 57. She faints. 58. You endeavour. 59. He will dance. 60. We both shall endeavour.
Examples: .
1. I should/may
laugh
Aham/Ham/
Ammi
Pråkrta Exercise Book
Hasamu/Hasȧmu/
Hasimu/Hasemu.
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 8, study lessons 1 to 27 of "Prākṛta Grammar and Composition".

33

Page #57

12. We all shall hide - Amhel
Vayam
Lukkihimo/Lukkihimu/ Lukkihima/Lukkissāmo/ Lukkissamu/Lukkissāma/ Lukkihāmo/Lukkihamu/ Lukkihama/Lukkissimo/ Lukkissimu/Lukkissima.
25.He woke up:
So
Jaggia.
36. You should/ :
may stay
Tumam/Tur/ Thāhi/Thāsu/ Tuha
Thādhi.
Te
43. They both
quarrel
Kalahanti/Kalahante/ Kalahire/Kalahenti.
54. You all tire -
Tubbhel Tumhel Tujjhe
Thakkaha/Thakkadha/ Thakkitthā/Thakkehal Thakkedha/Thakkeitthā.
(B) Write all the alternatives of the Personal Pronouns in
agreement with the number of the following Verbal forms.
1. ...... Hossanti 2. ...... Kalahase 3. ..... Lukkissimo 4. ...... Ullasissai 5. ....... Jivissiha 6. ...... Ujjamissāmi
Ruvanti 8. ...... Tadaphadasi 9. ...... Lajjamo
Naccam 11. ...... Kampaha 12. ...... Kulledi ...... Utthantu 14. ...... Ucchalejjāma 15. ..... Sayamo 16. ...... Thau 17. ...... Acchai 18. ...... Hasamu
...... Ullaseha 20. ...... Naccentu 21. ..... Thāhia 22. ...... Jiveu 23. ...... Kampanti 24. ...... Acchissadha
5. ....... Kullejjāmi 26. ...... Hasissāmi 27..... Mucchamo 28. ...... Thakkissae 29. ...... Marissaitthā 30. ...... Ghumejjāhi 31. ...... Padissama 32. ...... Darei. 33. ...... Rūsitthā 34. ...... Nhami 35. ..... Acchejjā 36. ..... Jaggeu
34
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #58

37. ...... Jaggia
Naccihii ....... Padante .... Darejjäsi ...... Ghumamu
Hoejjā
Uttheti 58. ...... Lukkemu 61. ... Hohima 67. ...... Ņhantu
38. ...... Khelamu 41. ...... Mucchae 44. ...... Acchihimi 47. ...... Marire 50. ...... Ņhaejjāha 53. ...... Ruvei 56. ...... Kalahante 59. ...... Lajjissanti 65. ...... Darihima 68. ...... Ucchala
39. ...... Ujjamissāmo 42. ...... Ujjamejjasu 45. Thakkittha 48. ...... Rūsae 51.
Khelaha 54. Ujjamedhi 57. Tadaphadae 60. ...... Sayissima
..... Ghumissam 69. ...... Kullemu
Examples: - . 1. Te/Tä
Hossanti. 2. Tumam/Tum/Tume Kalahase. 3. Amhe/Vayam Lukkissimo.
(C) Write all the alternative forms of the Present Tense (Pre.),
the Past Tense (P.) the Imperative (Imp.) and the Future Tense (Fu.) of Verbs given in brackets as directed in agreement with the following Personal Pronouns. 1. Amhe (Hasa) (Pre.) 2. Tumam (Muccha) (Fu.) 3. Ham (Jujjha) (Imp.) 4. Tubbhe (Pada) (Imp.) 5. Te (Accha) (Imp.) 6. Tum (Thakka) (Fu.) 7. Să (Dara) (Pre.)
8. Amhe (Jagga) (Imp.) 9. So (Mara) (P.)
10. Tão (Rusa) (Pre.) 11. Te (Ghuma) (Imp.) 12. Tuha (Ņhå) (P.) 13. Amhe (Kalaha) (Pre.) 14. Tumhe (Ho) (Imp.) 15. Ahaṁ (Lukka) (Fu.) 16. So (Ruva) (Pre.) 17. Să (Uttha) (Imp.) 18. Tău (Ucchala) (Fu.) 19. Tumhe (Khela) (Pre.) 20. Tuha (Saya) (Imp.) 21. So (Tadaphada) (Fu.) 22. Tau (Lajja) (Pre.) 23. Vayam (Ullasa) (Imp.) 24. Tā (Ņacca) (Fu.)
Prákyta Exercise Book
35

Page #59

25. Tujjhe (Tha) (Pre.)
27. Ammi (Kampa) (Fu.) 29. Tuha (Ujjama) (Imp.)
Example: -
1. Amhe
(D) Point out the Person, Number, Original Verb, Suffix and Tense in each of the following Verbal forms.
1. Kullamo
4. Sayeha
7. Rūsemi
Hasamo/Hasamu/Hasama.
10. Jaggissadha
13. Lukkehi
16. Uṭṭhejjāsi
19. Hoejjä
22. Lajjau 25. Hohi
28. Taḍaphadei
31. Padami
34. Acchasi
36
1. Kullamo
Example: -

26. Tumhe (Jiva) (Imp.) 28. Ham (Nhȧ) (P.) 30. So (Kulla) (Fu.)
2. Mucchesi
5. Tadaphaḍae
8. Thāsĩ
11. Padejjāhi
14. Lajjamo
17. Khelaha
20. Lajjia
23. Naccanti
26. Ruvante
29. Naccihinti
32. Uṭṭha
35. Jujjhissämo
Person
First Person
Plural
3. Ujjamissasi
6. Kampissiha
9. Nhȧejjāha
12. Jivissai
15. Ullasissase
18. Ghumissāmi
21. Hasissanti
24. Nhähiha
27. Lukkihämo 30. Lajjase
33. Kullejjāmi 36. Hasejjāma
Number Original Suffix Tense
Verb
Kulla

mo
Present
Präkṛta Exercise Book

Page #60

Exercise 9
(A) Correct the following sentences of the Present Tense in two
ways. (i) Write the correct Verbal form according to the Personal
Pronoun. (ii) Write the correct Personal Pronoun according to the
Verbal form.
1. Aham Lukkasi. 2. Tumam Naccami. 3. So Hasesi. 4. Amhe Hasadi. 5. Tumhe Thakkanti. 6. Te Lajjamo. 7. Tā Padadha. 8. Tubbhe Ghumanti. 9. Vayam Thāi. 10. Te Marai. 11. So Khelanti. 12. Tuha Paditthā. 13. Tujjhe Ucchalade. 14. Ham Kampittha. 15. Ammi Kullanti. 16. Tuha Mucchei. 17. Tumhe Nhāmu. 18. Amhe Hosi. 19. Tā Utthai. 20. Tuha Marante.
Example: -
1. Aham Lukkasi : (i) Aham (ii) Tumam/Tum/Tuha
Lukkami/Lukkami/Lukkemi. Lukkasi/Lukkase/Lukkesi.
(B) Correct the following sentences of the Imperative in two ways. (i) Write the correct Verbal form according to the Personal
Pronoun. (ii) Write the correct Personal Pronoun according to the
Verbal form.
1. Ham Padau. 2. Tuha Ruvamo. 3. So Thakkadhi. 4. Amhe Darantu. 5. Tumhe Kampamu. 6. Tum Mucchadu. 7. Så Kullaha. 8. Aham Jujjhentu. 9. Tubbhe Darāmo. 10. Ham Tadaphada.
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 9 study lessons 1 to 27 of “Prákşta Grammar and Composition".
Prákyta Exercise Book
37

Page #61

11. Te Acchau. 12. So Utthaha. 13. Ta Kheladha. 14. Har Nhādhi. 15. Tumaṁ Kulladu. 16. Te Ruvau. 17. Ammi Ullasa. 18. So Kalahasu. 19, Tubbhe Acchejjasu. 20. Ammi Lajjasu.
Example: - 1. Haṁ Padau = (i) Ham Padamu/Paďámu/Paạimu/Paņemu. (ii) So/Så Padau.
(C) Correct the following sentences of the Future Tense in two
ways. (i) Write the correct Verbal form according to the Personal
Pronoun. (ii) Write the correct Personal Pronoun according to the
Verbal form.
1. Tuha Utthissaṁ. 2. Ham Padihisi. 3. Să Kampihimi. 4. Aham Lajjissimo. 5. Tum Hasihiha. 6. Tumhe Darihimu. 7. Amhe Khelissadha. 8. Tubbhe Mucchissade. 9. Tā Ņhahidi. 10. Tumam Marihima. 11. Tum Kullissimo. 12. Ammi Jujjhissaitthā. 13. Ham Khelihiha. 14. Tão Nhāhidha. 15. Tāu Ujjamihidha. 16. Vayam Jaggissiha. 17. So Rusissiire. 18. Te Nhåhimi. 19. Tujjhe Mucchihinti. 20. Has Ghumissimu.
Example: - 1. Tuha Utthissam = (i) Tuha Utthihisi/Utthihise/Utthissasi/
Utthissase/Utthissisi/Utthissise. (ii) Aham/Ham/Ammi Utthissaṁ.
(D) Write all the alternatives of the Personal Pronouns in
agreement with the number of the following Verbal forms.
1. ...... Thakkami 4. ...... Utha
2. ...... Daramo 5. ...... Kalahase
3. ...... Padamu 6. ...... Mucchahi
38
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #62

7. ...... Acchadha 8. ...... Mucchihiha 9. ..... Homu 10. ..... Kullau 11. ...... Jujjhadu 12. ...... Ujjamantu
Kampasi 14. ...... Ullasei 15. ...... Ucchalae
Lajjia 17. ...... Marihimi ...... Jujjhisside 19. ...... Jaggissadha 20. ...... Tháhidha 21. ..... Ullasa
Jaggahi 23. ...... Ņhadi 24. ...... Mucchihinti 25. ...... Nhāhi 26. ..... Khelissisi 27. .... Utthihimo 28. ...... Sayantu 29. ...... Lajjissaitthā 30. ...... Ujjamejjasu
Examples: - 1. Aham/Ham/Ammi 2. Amhe/Vayam 3. Aham/Ham/Ammi
Thakkami. Daramo. Padamu.
WLAN
(E) Write all the alternative forms of the Present Tense (Pre.),
the Past Tense (P.), the Imperative (Imp.) and the Future Tense (Fu.) of Verbs given in brackets as directed in agreement with the following Personal Pronouns. 1. Haṁ (Kulla) (Pre.). 2. Amhe (Khela) (Fu.) 3. Tumhe (Uttha) (Imp.) 4. Aham (Accha) (Past.) 5. Tubbhe (Muccha) (Past.). 6. Tujjhe (Hasa) (Fu.) 7. Så (Lajja) (Past.)
8. Ammi (Dara) (Fu.) 9. Aham (Ullasa) (Pre.) 10. Te (Jujjha) (Fu.)
Example: - 1. Ham Kullami/Kullami/Kullemi.
Prakrta Exercise Book
39

Page #63

Exercise 10
(A) Translate the following sentences into Prákặta. Write all the
alternatives of the inflected Personal Pronouns, Absolutives and the Verbal forms.
1. Having wept, he sleeps. 2. Having leaped, you jump. 3. Having played, I shall rejoice. 4. Having quarrelled, they hide. 5. Having danced, she tires. 6. Having feared, we weep. 7. Having trembled, they all die. 8. Having fallen, you get up. 9. Having laughed, I live. 10. Having floundered, she died. 11. Having jumped, they both die. 12. Having quarrelled, you both weep. 13. Having embarrassed, she dances. 14. Having gone round, you should sleep. 15. Having tired, we all should sleep. 16. Having endeavoured, they will leap. 17. Having slept, I shall get up. 18. Having quarrelled, he falls. 19. Having rejoiced, you all should play. 20. Having wept, she faints. 21. Having sat, they both will get up. 22. Having rejoiced, I shall go round. 23. Having fainted, she dies. 24. Having stayed, you sit. 25. Having lived, they all rejoice. 26. Having bathed, he/she should sleep. 27. Having rejoiced, you may play. 28. Having hid, she weeps. 29. Having laughed, you should live. 30. Having endeavoured, he dances.
Examples: - 1. Having wept, - So Ruviúņa/Ruviūņam/ Sayai/Sayael he sleeps Ruvidūņa/Ruvidūņam/ Sayadi/Sayade.
Ruvia/Ruviya/Ruvium/ Ruvitta/Ruvea/Ruveum/ Ruveuņa/Ruvetta/ Ruveuņam/Ruvedūņa/ Ruvedūņam/Ruveya
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 10, study lesson 28 of “Pråksta Grammar and Composition".
40
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #64

26. Having bathed, - Sol
he/she should Sa sleep
Sayau/Sayeu/ Sayadu/Sayedu.
Ņhäúņa/Ņhäúņam Ņhádūņa/Ņhädüşar Ņhaa/Ņhảya/Ņháum/ Ņhátta- Ņhatta
(B) Translate the following sentences into Prákệta according to
the following rule given in the footnote of the lesson 28 of “Prákyta Grammar and Composition".
Rule (6) 1. Having tired, he slept. 2. Having fought, he fell. 3. Having slept, I got up. 4. Having played, you all will tire. 5. Having lived, we all rejoice.
Example: - 1. Having tired, he slept : So Thakkittäņa/Thakkittåņam/Thakkettăņa/
Thakkettäņam/Thakkaya/Thakkael Thakkiyāņa/ Thakkiyāņam/Thakkittu/ Thakkettu
Sayia.
(C) Make sentences in Praksta by using the following Absolutives.
By using your desired Personal Pronoun write all the alternatives of Verbal forms given in brackets in accordance with the Tenses as directed. 1. Hasiūņa (Jiva) Pre. .. 2. Utthidūņa (Khela) Imp. 3. Jujjhiūņam (Mara) Fu. 4. Ucchalia (Kulla) Imp. 5. Lukkium (Ruva) Pre. 6. Ujjamittā (Ucchala) Fu. 7. Ghumiūņa (Saya) Imp. 8. Kalahidūņa (Lukka) Pre.
9. Daria (Ruva) Pre. 10. Ullasitta (Khela) Imp. 11. Sayidūņaṁ (Uttha) Fu. 12. Nhāum (Saya) Imp. 13. Ruvittă (Muccha) Fu. 14. Thâdûņa (Accha) Imp. 15. Kheliūņa (Ullasa) Pre. 16. Padia (Ruva) Pre. 17. Tadaphaạiūņa (Mara) Fu. 18. Thakkiuṁ (Saya) Imp. 19. Jivittá (Ullas) Pre. 20. Lajjiūņaṁ (Ņacca) Pre.
Prakrta Exercise Book
,
4

Page #65

21. Hodūņa (Ruva) Fu. 22. Jaggeúna (Uttha) Imp. 23. Kulledūņam (Mara) Pre. 24. Mucchittă (Pada) Pre. 25. Ņaccium (Ullasa) Fu. 26. Rusia (Saya) Pre. 27. Ullasiūņam (Accha) Imp. 28. Kampiya (Pada) Pre. 29. Lajjium (Hasa) Pre. 30. Daria (Jagga) Pre.
Example: - 1. Aham/Ham/Ammi Hasiūņa
Jivami/Jivāmi/Jivemi,
(D) (i) From the Verbs given in brackets choose any one Verb for
adding the suffixes of Absolutive to it. And make sentences by including the Absolutive and by adding the suffixes of the Present Tense or the Past Tense to the other Verb in accordance with the given Personal Pronoun. Write all the alternatives. 1. So (Dara, Ruva)
2. Ham (Hasa, Jiva) 3. Te (Tadaphaďa, Mara) 4. Sā (Jujjha, Pada) 5. Amhe (Jiva, Ullasa) 6. Tumhe (Ucchala, Ruva) 7. Tuha (Pada, Uttha) 8. Så (Muccha, Mara) 9. Tá (Lajja, Ņacca) 10. So (Ņacca, Thakka)
Example: - 1. So Dariūņa/Dariūņam/Daridūņa/
Daridūņam/Dariya/Darium/ Daritta
Ruvai/Ruvae/ Ruvadi/Ruvade.
(D) (ii) From the Verbs given in brackets choose any one Verb for
adding the suffixes of Absolutive to it. And make sentences by including the Absolutive and by adding the suffixes of the Imperative to the other Verb in accordance with the given Personal Pronoun. Write all the alternatives.
1. Tumaṁ (Ucchala, Kulla) 3. Ammi (Țha, Accha)
2. Tujjhe (Ullasa, Khela) 4. Să (Ņhå, Saya)
42
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #66

5. Tum (Ghuma, Saya) 7. Ham (Khela, Saya) 9. Tubbhe (Khela, Accha)
Example: -
Ucchaliuna/Ucchaliūṇam/
Tumam Ucchalidūņa/Ucchalidūņaṁ/
Kullahi/Kullasu/Kulladhi/
Kulla/Kullehi/Kullesu/
Ucchaliya/Ucchalium/Ucchalittä Kulledhi/Kullejjasu/
Kullejjahi/Kullejje.
(D) (iii) From the Verbs given in brackets choose any one Verb for adding the suffixes of Absolutive to it. And make sentences by including the Absolutive and by adding the suffixes of the Future Tense to the other Verb in accordance with the given Personal Pronoun. Write all the alternatives
1. Ammi (Khela, Ullasa) 3. Tau (Lajja, Nacca) 5. So (Muccha, Mara) 7. Aham (Saya, Uttha) 9. Te (Ujjama, Khela)
Example: -
1. Ammi
6. Te (Ujjama, Kulla) 8. Tão (Ullasa, Jiva) 10. So (Ujjama, Khela)
1. Lajjium
4. Dareūņa

Kheliuna/Kheliūņaṁ/
2. Te (Ujjama, Ucchala) 4. Vayam (Accha, Uṭṭha) 6. Tumhe (Ghuma, Ullasa) 8. Sa (Hasa, Nacca) 10. Tuha (Ucchala, Kulla)
Khelittä
Kheliduna/Khelidūṇam/Ullasihămi/Ullasissimi/
Kheliya/Khelium/
Präkrta Exercise Book
Ullasihimi/Ullasissami/
(E) Point out the Original Verb and Suffix in each of the following
Absolutives.
2. Ghumittā 5. Kalahia
Ullasehimi/Ullasessami/
Ullasehämi/Ullasissam/
Ullasessaṁ.
3. Acchedūņa
6. Thakkidūņa

43

Page #67

7. Urtheuna 10. Jaggittu 13. Sayedūņam 16. Thādūņa 19. Padiūņa 22. Ullasiūņam 25. Lukkittāņa 28. Hoūņa 31. Lukkitta 34. Rúsaya
8. Khelitta 11. Kullius 14. Jivittā 17. Tadaphaditta 20. Ullaseúnam 23. Ncciuṁ 26. Jiviuṁ 29. Marium 32. Kampiūna 35. Jaggiya
9. Hasitta 12. Ucchalium 15. Kampiyāņam 18. Ruvittá 21. Ujjamedūņa 24. Rūsittanam 27. Nhaitta 30. Thādūņań 33. Ullasiyānam 36. Ucchalettāņa
Examples :
Suffix
1. 27.
um
Original Verb lajja nháa
Lajjium Ņhaitta
tta
44
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #68

(A) Translate the following sentences into Prākṛta. Write all the alternatives of the inflected Personal Pronouns, Infinitives and the Verbal forms.
1. They all live for rejoicing. 2. You should endeavour to wake up. 3. We all shall tire for sleeping. 4. She got up for dancing. 5. He jumps for dying. 6. You should endeavour to leap. 7. They both go round for tiring. 8. He flounders for dying. 9. You both should get up for dancing. 10. She stayed for quarrelling. 11. They all should get up to sleep. 12. They all endeavour for waking up. 13. He hides to weep. 14. You should endeavour for playing. 15. We shall go round for rejoicing. 16. He stayed for quarrelling. 17. You should go round for tiring. 18. They all will rejoice for going round. 19. You all should live for rejoicing. 20. You should get up to jump. 21. She sulks for playing. 22. You should dance for laughing. 23. He will stay for bathing. 24. They all will endeavour to dance. 25. You all should stay to sit. 26. We all shall live for rejoicing. 27. They hid for quarrelling. 28. They both will rejoice to play. 29. He should stay for jumping. 30. They weep to sleep.
Exercise 11
Examples: -
1. They all live = Te Ullasium/Ullasidum/ Jivanti/Jiventi/
for rejoicing
Ullaseum/Ullasedum Jivante/Jivire.
23. He will stay for bathing
=

So Nhaum/Nhadum
Thähii/Thahidi/ Thassai/Thassadi/
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 11, study lesson 29 of
"Prākṛta Grammar and Composition".
Präkrta Exercise Book

Thassidi.
45

Page #69

(B) Translate the following sentences into Prākṛta according to the following rule given in the footnote of the lesson 29 of "Prakṛta Grammar and Composition".
Rule (5)
1. He gets up to dance. 2. She falls to sit. 3. You all will play for rejoicing. 4. He should endeavour to wake up. 5. He wept for sleeping.
Example :
1. He gets up to dance =
So
Naccittae/Naccettae
(C) Make sentences by using the following Infinitives. By using your desired Personal Pronoun write all the alternative forms of Verbs given in brackets in accordance with the Tenses as directed.
1. Khelium (Rūsa) Pre. 3. Thakkeum (Ghuma) Fu. 5. Jaggeum (Ujjama) Imp. 7. Ucchalium (Ujjama) Imp. 9. Jujjhedum (Mara) Pre. 11. Ghumeur (Ullasa) Fu. 13. Naccium (Uṭṭha) Imp. 15. Kullium (Thā) Imp. 17. Ruveum (Lukka) Pre. 19. Naccettae (Lajja) Fu. 21. Nhaum (Accha) Imp. 23. Lukkedum (Ujjama) Fu. 25. Jivittae (Ujjama) Pre. 27. Thakkedum (Nacca) Fu. 29. Thakkium (Nacca) Pre.
46
Utthai/Utthae/Utthadi/Utthade.

2. Kalahidum (Accha) Pre. 4. Ullasedum (Jiva) Pre. 6. Maredum (Kulla) Pre. 8. Ullasittae (Ghuma) Fu. 10. Sayeum (Uttha) Imp. 12. Padidum (Kulla) Pre. 14. Sayeum (Ruva) Pre. 16. Jivedum(Ullasa) Fu. 18. Sayidum (Tha) Imp. 20. Utthium (Ujjama) Pre. 22. Ullasium (Khela) Pre. 24. Thaum (Accha) Imp. 26. Jujjhium (Uttha) Pre. 28. Sayedum (Thakka) Imp. 30. Kulledum (Uttha) Fu.

Präkṛta Exercise Book

Page #70

Example: - 1. Aham/Haṁ/Ammi Kheliun
Rūsami/Rúsámi/Rusemi.
-
(D) (i) From the Verbs given in brackets choose any one Verb for
adding the suffixes of Infinitive to it. And make sentences by including the Infinitive and by adding the suffixes of the Present Tense or the Past Tense to the other Verb in accordance with the given Personal Pronoun. Write all the alternatives of Verbal forms and Infinitive.
1. Amhe (Ullasa, Jiva) 3. Tā (Thakka, Ghuma) 5. Sā (Ņacca, Uttha) 7. Tão (Khela, Rüsa) 9. Så (Uttha, Ujjama)
2: Te (Kalaha, Ghuma) 4. Ham (Jagga, Ujjama) 6. So (Mara, Kulla) 8. Tuha (Saya, Ruva) 10. Tumhe (Pada, Kulla)
Example: - 1. Amhe Ullasium/Ullasiduṁ/Ullaseus/
Ullasedum/Ullasittae/Ullasettae
Jivia.
(D) (ii) From the Verbs given in brackets choose any one Verb for
adding the suffixes of Infinitive to it. And make sentences by including the Infinitive and by adding the suffixes of the Imperative to the other Verb in accordance with the given Personal Pronoun. Write all the alternatives of Verbal forms and Infinitive.
1. Te (Ghuma, Ullasa) 3. Amhe (Jiva, Vllasa) 5. Să (Thakka, Ņacca) 7. So (Kulla, Uttha) 9. Tão (Ullasa, Ghuma)
2. Tumaņ (Ņha, Țha) 4. Tàu (Thakka, Ghuma) 6. Tumhe (Lukka, Ullasa) 8. Tă (Ņacca, Lajja) 10. Aham (Khela, Tha)
Prakrta Exercise Book
47

Page #71

Ullasantu/Ullasentu.
Example: - 1. Te
Ghumium/Ghumidum/ Ghumeum/ Ghumedum/ Ghumittae/Ghumettae
(D) (iii) From the Verbs given in brackets choose any one Verb
for adding the suffixes of Infinitive to it. And make sentences by including the Infinitive and by adding the suffixes of the Future Tense to the other Verb in accordance with the given Personal Pronoun. Write all the alternatives of Verbal forms and Infinitive.
1. Te (Jaggar Ujjama) . 2. Tubbhe (Saya, Uttha) 3. Tumaṁ (Kulla, Thá) 4. So (Ņha, Accha) 5. Så (Ņacca, Uttha) 6. Tà (Ullasa, Jiva) 7. Tumhe (Hasa, Ņacca) 8. Vayam (Accha, Thá) 9. Tur (Saya, Thakka) 10. Ammi (Ucchala, Ujjama)
Example: - 1. Te Jaggium/Jaggidur
Jaggeus/Jaggedur/ Jaggittae/Jaggettae
Ujjamihinti/Ujjamihinte/ Ujjamihiire/Ujjamissanti/ Ujjamissante/Ujjamissaire/ Ujjamissinti/Ujjamissinte/ Ujjamissiire.
(E) Pick out the Original Verb and the Suffix in each of the
following Infinitives.
1. Hasium 4. Ruvium
7. Utthium 10. Mucchidur 13. Ucchalidur
2. Lajjiduṁ 5. Tadaphadeum 8. Accheum 11. Ullasium 14. Sayedur
3. Ghumedum 6. Kalahidum
9. Padedum 12. Jujjheum 15. Kulleur
48
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #72

16. Ujjamittae 19. Ullasidum 22. Kampiuṁ 25. Rūsedur 28. Jiveur 31. Ujjamium
17. Kheleur 20. Maredum 23. Lukkettae 26. Jaggium 29. Hour 32. Lukkidum
18. Naccidum 21. Jiveum 24. Thădur 27. Nhẫurn 30. Sayidur 33. Hodum
Example: -
Suffix
Original Verb Hasa
Hasium
um
Prakrta Exercise Book
49

Page #73

Exercise 12
(A) Translate the following sentences into PrākȚta. Write all the
alternatives of the inflected Personal Pronouns, Absolutives, Infinitives and the Verbal forms.
1. Having rejoiced, you should live. 2. She gets up to dance. 3. They all will endeavour for jumping. 4. Having gone round, you tire. 5. He jumps to die. 6. Having laughed, you all should play. 7. Having waken up, we all get up. 8. Having played, I rejoice. 9. She will embarrass for dancing. 10. Having stayed, you all should bathe. 11. I shall get up for going round. 12. Having trembled, he faints. 13. Having quarrelled, they both will die. 14. You should stay to sit. 15. Having quarrelled, they both flounder. 16. Having laughed, I shall live. 17. Having embarrassed, she will dance. 18. Having sulked, you sleep. 19. They should endeavour to wake up. 20. They will rejoice for going round. 21. You should stay for getting up. 22. Having wept, she will sleep. 23. We shall go round for rejoicing. 24. They all hide to quarrel. 25. Having bathed, you should sleep. 26. Having danced, you tire. 27. Having sat, they all should play. 28. You wake up for getting up. 29. I get up to sleep. 30. Having rejoiced, she will go round.
Examples: -
1. Having -
rejoiced, you should live
Tumam/Tur/ Ullasiūņa/Ullasiūņam/ Jivahi/Jivasu/ Tuha
Ullasidūņa/Ullasidūņaṁ/Jivadhi/Jiva/ Ullasium/Ullasiyal Jivehi/Jivesu/ Ullasitta
Jivedhi/Jivejjasu/ Jivejjahi/Jivejje.
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 12, study lessons 28 to 29 of "Prákşta Grammar and Composition".
50
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #74

24. They all hide - Te
to quarrel
Jujjhium/Jujjheum Lukkanti/Lukkante/ Jujjhidum/Jujjhedum/ Lukkire. Jujjhittae/Jujjhettae
(B) Make sentences in Praksta by using the following Participles
(Absolutive and Infinitive). By using your desired Personal Pronoun write all the alternative forms of Verbs given in brackets according to the Tenses as directed.
1. Ullasittă (Jiva) Imp. 2. Naccidum (Lajja) Fu. 3. Kampidūņa(Muccha) Pre. 4. Hasittäņam (Khela) imp. 5. Ghumium (Ullasa) Fu. 6. Ņhāittāņa (Saya) Imp. 7. Hasium (Uttha) Pre. 8. Kheliūņa (Ullasa) Pre. 9. Ullasettu (Ghuma) Fu. 10. Acchāya (Khela) Imp. 11. Sayittu (Uttha) Pre. 12. Ruve (Saya) Fu. 13. Utthittae (Jagga) Imp. 14. Marettána (Kulia) Pre. 15. Tháittu (Nha) Imp. 16. Ucchalaya (Ujjama) Fu. 17. Jaggiuṁ (Uttha) Pre. 18. Utthidum (Țhå) Imp. 19. Lajjiyānam (Nacca) Pre. 20. Jujjhiduņam (Mara) Fu. 21. Ujjamettu (Uttha) Imp. 22. Ghumittā (Țhã) Fu. 23. Jiviuṁ (Ujjama) Fu. 24. Kalahittàņa (Ruva) Pre. 25. Lukke (Accha) Imp. 26. Kheliyāna(Rusa) Pre. 27. Thakkidūņa(Ghuma)Fu. 28. Padeūņa (Ruva) Pre. 29. Tadaphaạittae (Mara) Fu. 30. Ullasettāņa (Nacca) Imp.
-
Example : - 1. Aham/Ham/
Ammi
Ullasitta
Jivamu/Jivāmu/ Jivimu/Jivemu.
(C) (i) From the Verbs given in brackets choose any one Verb for
adding the suffixes of Absolutive or Infinitive to it. And make sentences by including the Absolutive or the Infinitive and by adding the suffixes of the Present Tense or the Past Tense to the other Verb in accordance with the given Personal Pronoun. Write all the alternatives.
Prakyta Exercise Book
51

Page #75

1. So (Lajja, Ņacca) 2. Så (Jujjha, Mara) 3. Ham (Khela, Ullasa) 4. Tuha (Saya, Uttha) 5. Te (Mara, Kulla) 6. Amhe (Khela, Accha) 7. Tumhe (Ullasa, Ghuma) 8. Tā (Kampa, Mara) 9. So (Kalaha, Ruva) 10. Tumam (Pada, Ruva)
Naccai/Naccael Naccadi/Naccade.
Example: - 1. So Lajjiúņa/Lajjiūņam/
Lajjidūņa/Lajjidūņam/Lajjiya/ Lajjium/Lajjitta/Lajjittäņa/ Lajjittaņas/Lajjaya/ Lajjāe/Lajjiyaņa/ Lajjiyåņam/Lajjittu
(C) (ii) From the Verbs given in brackets choose any one Verb for
adding the suffixes of Absolutive or Infinitive to it. And make sentences by including the Absolutive or the Infinitive and by adding the suffixes of the Imperative to the other Verb in accordance with the given Personal Pronoun. Write all the alternatives. 1. So (Khela, Ujjama) 2. Tuha (Thi, Accha) 3. Ham (Khela, Saya) 4. Tā (Ullasa, Jiva) 5. Te (Kulla, Ujjama) 6. Amhe (Jagga, Ujjama) 7. Tubbhe (Ņha, Saya) 8. Tuṁ (Uttha, Jagga) 9. Så (Accha, Khela) 10. Tumhe (Hasa, Khela)
Example: - 1. So Khelium/Khelidum/ Ujjamau/Ujjameu/
Kheleum/Kheledum, Ujjamadu/Ujjamedu. Khelittae/Khelettae
(C) (iii) From the Verbs given in brackets choose any one Verb
for adding the suffixes of Absolutive or Infinitive to it. And make sentences by including the Absolutive or the Infinitive and by adding the suffixes of the Future Tense to the other
52
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #76

Verb in accordance with the given Personal Pronoun. Write all the alternatives. 1. Te (Ucchala, Ujjama) 2. Ammi (Khela, Vllasa) 3. Vayas (Ullasa, Ghuma) 4. Så (Ņacca, Lajja) 5. Tuha (Ucchala, Kulla) 6. Tà (Saya, Uttha) 7. Tujjhe (Ņhå, Saya) 8. Haṁ (Hasa, Jiva) 9. So (Muccha, Mara) 10. Să (Ullasa, Ņacca)
Example: - 1. Te Ucchalium/Ucchalidum/
Ucchaleum/Ucchaledum/ Ucchalittae/Ucchalettae
Ujjamihinti/Ujjamihintel Ujjamihiire/Ujjamissanti/ Ujjamissante/ Ujjamissaire/Ujjamissinti/ Ujjamissinte/Ujjamissiire.
(D) Point out the Original Verb and the suffix in each of the
following Participles. Mention their names.
1. Hasitta 4. Sayiūņa 7. Jujjhãe 10. Kullia 13. Kheledūņa 16. Acchiyāņań 19. Jaggettae 22. Ullaske 25. Ujjamitta 28. Ucchaleu
2. Ghumidūna 5. Thāāya 8. Ņaccidum 11. Ruvittae 14. Lukkeum 17. Kampettu 20. Ņhāittāņa 23. Darium 26. Hoittana 29. Maritta
3. Mucchiyana 6. Tadaphadium
9. Utthidūņam 12. Padittāņa 15. Maridum 18. Thakkiūņa 21. Kalahiyána 24. Jiveūna 27. Ruvittu 30. Lajjittäņa
Example ::
Suffix
Participle
Original Verb Hasa
Hasitta
tta
Absolutive
Praksta Exercise Book
53

Page #77

Exercise 13 (A) Translate the following sentences into Prāksta. Write all the
alternatives of the Noun-forms, Participles and Verbal forms.
1. The dog barks. 2. The camel dances. 3. The son should rejoice. 4. The Human being grows old. 5. The ocean will dry up. 6. The maternal uncle should get up. 7. Fire burned. 8. The demon should die. 9.The cloth dries up. 10. The world will disappear. 11. The book should shine. 12. Pride vanishes. 13. The father-in-law should sit. 14. The friend will rejoice. 15. The sun rose. 16. The jewel shines. 17. Suffering should disappear. 18. The lion sits. 19. The house will fall. 20. The vow breaks. 21. The ocean should spread. 22. The grandfather will tire. 23. The grandson should go round. 24. Pride should disappear. 25. Rāma rejoices. 26. The child sulked. 21. Disgrace spreads. 28. The book falls. 29. The father gets up. 30. The husband's younger brother should go round. 31. God should shines. 32. The well will dry up. 33. The king should live. 34. The king laughs. 35. Hanumāna Jumps. 36. Death becomes. 37. Air spreads. 38. Water will drop. 39. The father should live. 40. Having dropped, the water spreads. 41. Having feared, the man dies. 42. The grandfather should rejoice for living. 43. The child weeps to sleep. 44. Having risen, the sun will shine. 45. Having rejoiced, the maternal uncle should sit. 46. Having flied, the serpent will fall. 47. The grandson should get up to dance. 48. Having quarreled, the son will embarrass. 49. The camel will dance for tiring. 50. The husband's younger brother should get up for going round. 51. Having fallen, the jewel breaks. 52. Having waken up, the father sits. 53. Having fallen, the house will disappear. 54. Having burnt, the small bundle disappears. 55. Having barked, the dog sits. 57. The demon jumped for dying. 58. Having spread, the water will dry up.
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 13, study lessons 30 to 31 of “Prākşta Grammar and Composition". Also make use of the rule 7 given in the footnote of lesson 31.
54
Praksta Exercise Book

Page #78

Examples: -
1. The dog barks
11. The book
should shine
26. The child sulked
37. Air spreads
57. The demon Jumped for dying.
=
Präkrta Exercise Book
=

=
Kukkuro/
Kukkure
=
Gantho/ Ganthe
= Balao/Bälae Rusia.
Märuo/ Marue
Rakkhaso/
Rakkhase
1. Narinda (Hasa) Pre. 3. Sayara (Sukkha) Fu. 5. Sasura (Ciṭṭha) Imp. 7. Avayasa (Pasara) Pre. 9. Balaa (Kanda) Fu. 11. Maula (Uṭṭha) Imp. 13. Pada (Sukkha) Pre. 15. Divayara (Uga) Past.
Bukkai/Bukkae/Bukkadi/ Bukkade/Bukkati/Bukketi/
Bukkate/Bukkete.
Sohau/Soheu/ Sohadu/Sohedu.
Pasarai/Pasarae/Pasaradi/ Pasarade/Pasaredi/ Pasarati/Pasareti.
(B) In the following a-ending Masculine Nouns and Verbs in brackets are given. Form sentences by using a-ending Masculine Nouns in Nominative case Singular Number according to the Tense as directed. Write all the alternatives.
Marium/
Maridum/
Mareum/
Maredum
Kullia.
2. Putta (Harisa) Imp.
4. Gavva (Gala) Pre.
6. Mitta (Ullasa) Fu. 8. Diara (Ghuma) Imp. 10. Nara (Jara) Pre. 12. Ghara (Paḍa) Fu. 14. Piämaha (Vala) Past. 16. Vaya (Tuṭṭa) Pre.

55

Page #79

17. Paramesara (Harisa) Imp. 18. Karaha (Pala) Past. 19. Kukkura (Bukka) Pre. 20. Gantha (Soha) Past. 21. Kayanta (Saya) Fu. 22. Potta (Khela) Past. 23. Agama (Soha) Imp. 24. Rahuņandaņa (Harisa) Pre. 25. Sappa (Udda) Pre. 26. Bhava (Khaya) Pre. 27. Kūva (Sukkha) Fu. 28. Rayana (Uppajja) Pre. 29. Rāya (Ujjama) Imp. 30. Hanuvanta (Kulla) Pre. 31. Huavaha (Jala) Fu. 32. Mārua (Dula) Pre. 33. Kayanta (Ho) Past. 34. Siha (Cittha) Pre. 35. Duha (Nassa) Imp. 36. Bappa (Jiva) Pre. 37. Salila (Ņijjhara) Fu. 38. Gavva (Gala) Past. 39. Rakkhasa (Mara) Fu. 40. Salila (Ludha) Pre.
Example: - 1. Narindo Hasai/Hasae/Hasadi/Hasade/Hasati/Hasate.
(C) (i) In the following a-ending Masculine Nouns and two Verbs
in brackets are given. For making sentences, use a-ending Masculine Nouns in the Nominative case Singular Number, choose any one Verb for adding the suffixes of the Absolutive or Infinitive to it, and add the suffixes of the Present Tense or the Past Tense to the other Verb. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms, Verbal forms and Participles.
1. Kukkura (Bukka, Ciţtha) 2. Piāmaha (Ghuma, Uttha) 3. Rayaņa (Pada, Tutta) 4. Jañera (Jagga, Kulla) 5. Potta (Thakka, Ghuma) 6. Ghara (Jala, Paļa) 7. Vaya (Gala, Ņassa) 8. Rahunandana (Harisa, Cittha) 9. Pada (Jala, Khaya) 10. Divāyara (Soha, Uga)
56
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #80

Ciţthia.
Example: - 1. Kukkuro Bukkiúņa/Bukkiūņam/Bukkidūņa/
Bukkidūņam/Bukkiya/Bukkiuṁ/ Bukkitta
(C) (ii) In the following a-ending Masculine Nouns and two Verbs
in brackets are given. For making sentences, use a-ending Masculine Nouns in the Nominative case Singular Number, choose any one Verb for adding the suffixes of the Absolutive or Infinitive to it, and add the suffixes of the Imperative to the other Verb. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms, Verbal forms and Participles.
1. Nara (Jiva, Harisa) 3. Diara (Ghuma, Uttha) 5. Rayana (Soha, Uppajja) 7. Māula (Kulla, Ujjama) 9. Bălaa (Ņacca, Vrtha)
2. Karaha (Thakka, Ņacca) 4. Jañera (Harisa, Accha) 6. Salila (Sukkha, Ņijjhara) 8. Narinda (Harisa, Cițsha) 10. Potta (Khela, Ujjama)
Example: 1. Ņaro
Jivium/Jiveum/ Jividuṁ/Jiveduṁ
Harisau/Hariseu/ Harisadu/Harisedu.
(C) (iii) In the following a-ending Masculine Nouns and two Verbs
in brackets are given. For making sentences, use a-ending Masculine Nouns in the Nominative case Singular Number, choose any one Verb for adding the suffixes of the Absolutive or Infinitive to it, and add the suffixes of the Future Tense to the other Verb. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms, Verbal forms and Participles.
1. Gavva (Gala, Khaya) 3. Rakkhasa (Kulla, Mara)
2. Putta (Kalaha, Lajja) 4. Sappa (Udda, Paļa)
Prakrta Exercise Book
57

Page #81

5. Salila (Pasara, Sukkha) 6. Divāyara (Soha, Uga) 7. Pada (Jala, Nassa) . 8. Mārua (Pasara, Pada) 8. Dukkha (Uppajja, Khaya) 10. Balaa (Ruva, Saya)
Example: - 1. Gavvo Galiūna/Galiūnas/
Galidúna/Galidūņam/ Galiya/Galium/Galitta
Khayihii/Khayihie/Khayihidi/ Khayihide/Khayissai/ Khayissae/Khayissadi/ Khayissade/Khayissidi/ Khayisside.
(D) In the following a-ending Nouns are given alongwith Case
endings. Point out the Person, Number, Original Noun, Gender and Case-ending in each of following Nouns.
1. Narindo 4. Potto 7. Mitto 10. Naro 13. Sāyaro 16. Siho 19. Agamo 2 2. Rakkhaso 25. Gãmo 28. Gharo
2. Karaho 5. Kukkuro 8. Bālao 11. Sappo 14. Huavaho 17. Rayaņo 20. Māruo 23. Dukkho 26. Rayo 29. Vayo
3. Haņuvanto 6. Gavvo 9. Piāmaho 12. Bhavo 15. Pado 18. Diaro 21. Kayanto 24. Bappo 27. Avayaso 30. Māulo
Example
Person
Number Original Gender Case Noun
ending Singular Narinda Mascu. O
1. Narindo
Third Person
58
Praksta Exercise Book

Page #82

Exercise 14
(A) Translate the following sentences into Prākṣta. Write all the
alternatives of the Noun-forms, Participles and Verbal forms.
1. Dogs bark. 2. Camels dance. 3. Sons should rejoice. 4. Human beings grow old. 5. Oceans will dry up. 6. Clouds thunder. 7. Demons should die. 8.Cloths dry up. 9. Books should shine. 10. Friends will rejoice. 11. Jewels shine. 12. Lions will sit. 13. Houses fall. 14. Grandsons should go round. 15. Children will sulk. 16. Sufferings disappear. 17. Books fall. 18. Wells dried up. 19. Kings laugh. 20. Vows shine. 21. Demons fear. 22. Sons should live. 23. Serpents flied. 24. Maternal uncles should get up. 25. Demons will faint. 26. Human beings should endeavour. 27. Children weep. 28. Kings should rejoice. 29. Clouds will spread. 30. Houses will burn. 31. Sons tremble. 32. Vows break. 33. Demons will run away. 34. Dogs quarrel. 35. Kings faint. 36. Children jump. 37. Grnadsons should leap. 38. Human beings quarrel. 39. Children weep to sleep. 40. Having rejoiced, the maternal uncles should sit. 41. Having flied, serpents will fall. 42. Having quarreled, the sons embarrasseet. 43. Grandsons should get up to dance. 44. Having danced, the camels will tire. 45. Having fallen, the jewels break. 46. Having burnt, the houses will fall. 47. Having barked, the dogs quarrel 48. Demons will jump to die. 49. Having rejoiced, the sons should live. 50. Having endeavoured, the human beings shine. 51. Having leaped, the children should jump. 52. Grandsons should endeavour to dance. 53. Having rejoiced, the kings should sit. 54. Having fainted, the demons will die. 55. Having run away, the children should play. 156. Having danced, the sons tire.
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 14, study lesson 32 of
“Pråkrta Grammar and Composition". Prákyta Exercise Book
59

Page #83

Examples : - 1. Dogs bark -
Kukkură Bukkanti/Bukkenti/
Bukkire/Bukkante.
Potta
Ghumantu/Ghumentu.
14. Grandsons should :
go round
23.Serpents flied
-
Sappå Uddia.
Mehā
Pasarihinti/Pasarihintel
29. Clouds will
spread =
Pasarihiire/Pasarissanti/ Pasarissante/Pasarissaire/ Pasarissinti/Pasarissinte/ Pasarissiire.
42. Having quarreled, - Puttā
the sons embarrassed
Kalahiūņa/Kalahiūņaṁ! Lajjia.
Kalahidūņa/Kalahidūņam/ Kalahium/Kalahiya/Kalahitta
(B) In the following a-ending Masculine Nouns and Verbs in
brackets are given. Form sentences by using a-ending Masculine Nouns in Nominative case Plural Number according to the Tenses as directed. Write all the alternatives.
1. Narinda (Hasa) Pre. 3. Sayara (Sukkha) Fu. 5. Mitta (Ullasa) Fu. 7. Balaa (Kanda) Fu.
9. Māula (Uttha) Imp. 11. Pada (Sukkha) Pre. 13. Karaha (Pala) Past. 15. Gantha (Soha) Pre. 17. Potta (Khela) Imp.
2. Putta (Harisa) Imp. 4. Gavva (Gala) Imp. 6. Diara (Ghuma) Pre. 8. Nara (Jara) Pre. 10. Ghara (Pada) Fu. 12. Vaya (Tutta) Pre. 14. Kukkura (Bukka) Pre. 16. Māula (Saya) Fut. 18. Agama (Soha) Imp.
60
Praksta Exercise Book

Page #84

19. Sappa (Uậda) Pre. 21. Rayaņa (Uppajja) Pre. 23. Siha (Accha) Pre. 25. Huavaha (Jala) Pre. 27. Karaha (Nacca) Pre. 29. Nara (Ujjama) Imp. 31. Putta (Kampa) Pre. 33. Duha (Gala) Fu. 35. Sappa (Vala) Fu. 37. Putta (Ucchala) Int. 39. Māula (Dara) Pre.
20. Kūva (Sukkha) Pre. 22. Rāya (Ujjama) Imp. 24. Duha (Ņassa) Past. 26. Rakkhasa (Mara) Fu. 28. Rayana (Soha) Fu. 30. Dukkha (Nassa) Fu. 32. Rāya (Harisa) Imp. 34. Ghara (Jala) Pre. 36. Potta (Kulla) Imp. 38. Mitta (Uttha) Imp. 40. Rakkhasa (Muccha) Fu.
Example :1. Narinda Hasanti/Hasenti/Hasire/Hasante.
(C) (i) In the following a-ending Masculine Nouns and two Verbs
in brackets are given. For making sentences, use a-ending Masculine Nouns in the Nominative case Plural Number, choose any one Verb for adding the suffixes of the Absolutive or Infinitive to it, and add the suffixes of the Present Tense or the Past Tense to the other Verb. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms, Verbal forms and Participles.
1. Kukkura (Bukka, Accha) 2. Rayana (Paļa, Tuțța) 3. Ghara (Jala, Pada) 4. Potta (Thakka, Ghuma) 5. Vaya (Gala, Ņassa) 6. Pada (Jala, Khaya) 7. Bălaa (Saya, Kanda) 8. Nara (Uppajja, Mara) 9. Putta (Ņacca, Thakka) 10. Rakkhasa (Mara, Kulla)
Prákyta Exercise Book
61

Page #85

Acchanti/Acchante/ Acchire/Acchenti.
Example: - 1. Kukkura Bukkiūna/Bukkiúnam/
Bukkidūna/Bukkidūnam/ Bukkiya/Bukkium/Bukkittä/ Bukkāya/Bukkael Bukkiyāņa/Bukkiyānań
(C) (ii) In the following a-ending Masculine Nouns and two Verbs
in brackets are given. For making sentences, use a-ending Masculine Nouns in the Nominative case Plural Number, choose any one Verb for adding the suffixes of the Absolutive or Infinitive to it, and add the suffixes of the Imperative to the other Verb. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms, Verbal forms and Participles.
1. Nara (Jiva, Harisa) 2. Karaha (Thakka, Nacca) 3. Diara (Ghuma, Uttha) 4. Rayaņa (Soha, Uppajja) 5. Potta (Nacca, Uttha) 6. Māula (Kulla, Ujjama) 7. Narinda(Harisa, Cittha) 8. Bālaa (Nacca, Uttha) 9. Potta (Khela, Ujjama) 10. Balaa (Pala, Khela)
Example: - 1. Narà Jivium/Jiveum/Jividum/
Jivedum/Jivittae/Jivettae
Harisantu/ Harisentu.
(C) (111) In the following a-ending Masculine Nouns and two Verbs
in brackets are given. For making sentences, use a-ending Masculine Nouns in the Nominative case Plural Number, choose any one Verb for adding the suffixes of the Absolutive or Infinitive to it, and add the suffixes of the Future Tense to the other Verb. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms, Verbal forms and Participles.
62
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #86

1. Meha (Nijjhara, Sukkha) 2. Putta (Kalaha, Lajja) 3. Rakkhasa (Kulla, Mara) 4. Sappa (Udda, Pada) 5. Pada (Jala, Nassa) 6. Dukkha (Uppajja, Khaya) 7. Bālaa (Ruva, Saya) 7. Karaha (Ņacca, Thakka) 9. Rayaņa (Paļa, Tutta) 10. Bālaa (Pala, Khela)
Example : - 1. Mehả Nijjhariūņa/Nijjhariūņas/ Sukkhihinti/Sukkhihintel
Nijjharidūņa/Nijjharidūņam/Sukkhihiire/Sukkhissanti/ Nijjhariuṁ/Nijjhariya/ Sukkhissante/Sukkhissaire/ Nijjharitta
Sukkhissinti/Sukkhissintel Sukkhissiire.
(D) In the following a-ending Nouns are given alongwith Case.
endings. Point out the Person, Number, Original Noun, Gender and Case-ending in each of following Nouns.
1. Narindā 4. Kukkurā
7. Bālaa 10. Sappa 13. Huavaha 16. Haņuvanta 19. Agama 22. Rakkhasă 25. Gama 28. Ghara
2. Karaha 5. Gavvā 8. Piāmahā. 11. Bhavă 14. Padā 17. Rayaņā 20. Marua 23. Dukkha 26. Raya 29. Vaya
3. Potta 6. Mitta
9. Nara 12. Sayarā 15. Siha 18. Diară 21. Kayantā 24. Bappa 27. Avayasa 30. Maula
Example: - Person Number Original Gender
Noun 1. Narinda Third Plural Narinda Masculine
Person
Case ending 0-å
63
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #87

Exercise 15
(A) Translate the following sentences into Prākṛta. Write all the alternatives of inflected a-ending Neuter Nouns, Verbal forms and Participles.
1. Wealth increases. 2. Rice will grow. 3. Wine should separate. 4. The government will spread. 5. Addictions should disappear. 6. The small bundle falls down. 7. Pleasure should increase. 8. Milk will drop. 9. Suffering should disappear. 10. States should endeavour. 11. Youth blooms. 12. Moral conduct should shine. 13. The sky roars. 14. Detachement increased. 15. The citizen will sleep. 16. The aircraft should fly. 17. The paper dries up. 18. The state mistakes. 19. The truth should bloom. 20. Wood will burn. 21. Water dropped. 22. The song should shine. 23. Gambling should vanish. 24. Grass grows. 25. Water drops. 26. Food increases. 27. Fear disappears. 28. Blood drops. 29. The field burns. 30. The cloth will dry up. 31. Wood burns. 32. Food will increase. 33. Clarified butter trickles. 34. The head aches. 35. Rice should grow. 36. The forest disappears. 37. Moral conduct shines. 38. The cloth will burn. 39. Water will drop. 40. Having bloomed, beauty appears. 41. Having vanished, the thread breaks. 42. The citizen should endeavour to wake up. 43. Having stayed, the aircraft will fly. 44. The state quarrels to spread. 45. Having stayed, the citizen will appear. 46. Having shined, the song will appear. 47. The citizen should endeavour for jumping. 48. The government enthuses for endeavouring. 49. Having increased, the knowledge should appear. 50. The citizen will endeavour to wake up. 51. Having grown, the rice increases. 52. The mind should calm down. 53. Wealth exists for quarrelling. 54. Having broken, the thread will disappear. 55. Having dropped, the milk spreads. 56. The debt disappears. 57. The citizen plays for rejoicing.
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 15 study lessons 34 to 35 of "Pråkṛta Grammar and Composition".
64

Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #88

Examples :: 1. Wealth
: Dhanaṁ Vaddhai/Vaddhei/Vaddhael increases
Vaddhadi/Vaddhade/Vaddhati/
Vaddhate. 8. Milk will drop - Khiraṁ Cuihii/Cuihie/Cuihidi/Cuihide/
Cuissai/Cuissae/Cuissadi/Cuissade/
Cuissidi/Cuisside. 21. Water dropped = Udagaṁ Cuia. 28. Blood drops - Rattań Cuai/Cuae/Cuadi/Cuade/Cuei/
Cuedi/Cuati/Cueti/Cuate.
(B) In the following a-ending Neuter Nouns and Verbs in brackets
are given. Form sentences by using a-ending Neuter Nouns in Nominative case Singular Number according to the Tenses as directed. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms and Verbal forms.
1. Patta (Sukkha) Pre.. 2. Sila (Soha) Imp. 3. Sasaņa (Pasara) Fu. 4. Dhaņa (Vaddha) Pre. 5. Majja (Chuťța) Imp. 6. Khira (Cua) Fu. 7. Jovvana (Viasa) Pre. 8. Veragga (Vaddha) Imp. 9. Nayarajana (Saya) Fu. 10. Chikka (Phura) Pre. 11. Vimāņa (Udda) Imp. 12. Dhanna (Uga) Fu. 13. Naha (Guñja) Pre. 14. Rajja (Ujjama) Past. 15. Sokkha (Vaddha) Imp. 16. Pottala (Luậha) Pre. 17. Rajja (Cukka) Pre. 18. Vattha (Sukkha) Fu. 19. Vasaņa (Nassa) Imp. 20. Lakkuda (Jala) Fu. 21. Tiņa (Uga) Pre. 22. Bhaya (Khaya) Imp. 23. Sāsana (Chutta) Fu. 24. Ratta (Cua) Pre. 25. Júa (Chuțța) Imp. 26. Vattha (Sukkha) Pre. 27. Bhoyaņa (Vaddha) Fu. 28. Gana (Guñja) Imp. Prákrta Exercise Book
65

Page #89

29. Maraņa (Sijjha) Pre. 30. Kattha (Jala) Pre. 31. Ghaya (Tava) Imp. 32. Dhanna (Uga) Imp. 33. Vattha (Jala) Fu. 34. Khetta (Nassa) Pre. 35. Vaņa (Jala) Pre. 36. Udaga (Cua) Pre. 37. Pottala (Ludha) Fu. 38. Vimāņa (Udda) Pre. 39. Sokkha (Vaddha) Past. 40. Nayarajaņa (Harisa) Pre.
Example: - 1. Pattaṁ Sukkhai/Sukkhei/Sukkhae/Sukkhadi/
Sukkhade/Sukkhati/Sukkhate.
(C) (i) In the following a-ending Neuter Nouns and two Verbs in
brackets are given. For making sentences, use a-ending Neuter Nouns in the Nominative case Singular Number, choose any one Verb for adding the suffixes of the Absolutive or Infinitive to it, and add the suffixes of the Present Tense or the Past Tense to the other Verb. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms, Verbal forms and Participles.
1. Sutta (Gala, Tutta) 2. Rūva (Viasa, Phura) 3. Mana (Kila, Harisa) 4. Dhanna (Uga, Vaddha) 5. Dhaņa (Tava, Hava) 6. Khira (Cua, Pasara) 7. Riņa(Chutta, Ņassa) 8. Sasaņa (Cettha, Ucchaha) 9. Nayarajaņa (Harisa, Khela) 10. Puppha (Vaợdha, Viasa)
Example: - 1. Suttam Galidūņa/Galiūņaṁ) Tuțțai/Tutței/
Galidūņa/Galidūņaṁ! Tuttae/Tutsade/ Galium/Galiya/Galittà Tuttadi/Tuttati/Tuttate
66
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #90

(C) (ii) In the following a-ending Neuter Nouns and two Verbs in
brackets are given. For making sentences, use a-ending Neuter Nouns in the Nominative case Singular Number, choose any one Verb for adding the suffixes of the Absolutive or Infinitive to it, and add the suffixes of the Imperative to the other Verb. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms, Verbal forms and Participles.
1. Nayarajana (Jagara, Ceṭṭha) 2. Nana (Vaḍdha, Phura)
3. Mana (Khela, Rama)
4. Sasana (Vaddha, Pasara) 6. Majja (Chuṭṭa, Nassa) 8. Nayarajana (Thā, Vijja) 10. Khira (Cua, Pasara)
5. Dhanna (Uga, Soha) 7. Sacca (Phura, Soha) 9. Kamma (Tava, Sijjha)
Example: -
1. Nayarajanaṁ
Jägarium/Jägareum/ Cetthau/Cettheu/ Jägaridum/Jägaredum/ Ceṭṭhadu/Ceṭṭhedu. Jägarittae/Jägarettae
(C) (iii) In the following a-ending Neuter Nouns and two Verbs in brackets are given. For making sentences, use a-ending Neuter Nouns in the Nominative case Singular Number, choose any one Verb for adding the suffixes of the Absolutive or Infinitive to it, and add the suffixes of the Future Tense to the other Verb. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms, Verbal forms and Participles.
1. Vimana (Cittha, Vaddha) 2. Nayarajaṇa (Jāgara, Ujjama) 3. Sutta (Tuṭṭa, Nassa) 4. Gāņa (Guñja, Phura)
5. Nayarajana (Vijja, Ciṭṭha) 6. Vaņa (Jala, Khaya)
7. Tina (Uga, Vaḍdha)
8. Udaga (Cua, Pasara)
9. Sila (Phura, Soha)
10. Rajja (Pasara, Vaḍḍha)
Präkrta Exercise Book

67

Page #91

Example: 1. Vimåņam
Citthius/Cittheus/ Vaddhihii/Vaddhihiel Ciţthidum/Cittheduṁ/ Vaddhihidi/Vaddhihidel Citthittae/Citthettae Vaddhissai/Vaddhissael
Vaddhissadi/Vaddhissade/ Vaddhissidi/Vaddhisside.
(D) In the following a-ending Nouns are given alongwith Case
endings. Point out the Person, Number, Original Noun, Gender and Case-ending in each of following Nouns.
2. Manam
. Khetta
-
1. Dhaņań . 4. Sasaņam
7. Silam 10. Veraggam · 13. Khiram
16. Chikka 19. Tinań 22. Jovvanam 25. Asaņań
5. Pattam 8. Nayarajanam 11. Rattań 14. Vimāņam 17. Lakkuda 20. Bhoyanam
6. Sokkham
9. Bhayam 12. Majjań 15. Rajjar 18. Udagam 21. Suha 24. Nāņam 27. Kattham 30. Siraí
23. Kammam
26. Vatthaí 29. Riņam
28. Biam
Example :
Person
Number Original Gender Case Noun
ending Singular Dhaņa Neuterscom
1. Dhanam
Third Person
68
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #92

Exercise 16
(A) Translate the following sentences into Prākṛta. Write all the alternatives of inflected Nouns, Verbal forms and Participles.
1.Wealths should increase. 2. Addictions disappear. 3. Small bundles fall down. 4. Papers burn. 5. States endeavour. 6. Citizens will sleep. 7. Aircrafts may fly. 8. Papers dry up. 9. Woods will burn. 10. Citizens grieve. 11. Songs will shine. 1 2. States mistake. 13. Papers may dry up. 14. Forests disappear. 15. Threads burn. 16. Fears disappeared. 17. Seeds grow. 18. Addictions should disappear. 19. Songs shine. 20. The small bundle may fall down. 21. Forest will grow. 2 2. The citizen should endeavour. 23. Woods burned. 24. Forests bloom. 25. Small bundles will fall down. 26. Rice may grow. 27. Forests will disappear. 28. Fears should disappear. 29. Aircrafts fall. 30. Citizens should run away. 31. The goverment should spread. 32. Aircrafts will fly. 33. Threads break. 34. Cloths burn. 35. Citizens jump. 36. Fields disappear. 37. States should shine. 38. Seeds grow. 39. Having burnt, the threads will disappear. 40. Having mistaken, the citizens grieve. 41. Seeds will grow to increase. 42. Having grown, the rice increases. 43. Citizens enthuse to wake up. 44. Having burnt, the woods disappear. 45. Having thundered, the clouds appear. 46. Debts will disappear. 47. Having tumbled down, the small bundles fall. 48. Having enthused, the states endeavour. 49. Citizens get up to dance. 50. States quarrel to spread. 51. Having slept, the citizens will rejoice. 52. Having fallen, the aircrafts disappear. 53. Having endeavoured, the citizens should play. 54. Having stayed, the aircrafts will fly. 55. Having grown, the seeds increase. 56. Having burnt, the woods disappear. 57. Having jumped, the citizens ran away. 58. Having dried up, the cloths burn.
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 16, study lesson 36 of "Prākṛta Grammar and Composition".
Prakrta Exercise Book

69

Page #93

Examples :: 1. Wealths should
increase
Dhaņāim/Dhaņaiṁ/ Vaddhantu/ Dhanani
Vaddhentu.
10. Citizens grieve
23. Woods burned
- Nayarajaņāim/ Khijjanti/Khijjantel Nayarajan.is/ Khijjire/Khijjenti. Nayarajaņāņi = Lakkudaim
Jalia. Lakkudāiñ/ Lakkudāņi = Postalāim/ Ludhiūņa/ Padanti/ Pottalāiñ/ Ludhiūņam/ Padante/ Pottalāņi Ludhidūņa/ Padire!
Ludhidūņaṁ Padenti. Ludhiya/ Ludhium/Ludhitta
47. Having tumbled
down, the small bundles fall
(B) In the following a-ending Neuter Nouns and Verbs in brackets
are given. Form sentences by using a-ending Neuter Nouns in Nominative case Plural Number according to the Tenses as directed. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms and Verbal forms.
1. Vimāņa (Udda) Imp. 3. Dhaņa (Vaddha) Imp. 5. Rajja (Cettha) Imp. 7. Lakkuda (Jala) Fu.
9. Patta (Sukkha) Imp. 11. Gāņa (Guñja) Fu. 13. Dhanna (Uga) Pre. 15. Vasaņa (Nassa) Imp.
2. Vasaņa (Nassa) Pre. 4. Poțțala (Ludha) Pre. 6. Nayarajaņa (Lotta) Imp. 8. Nayarajaņa (Khijja) Pre. 10. Chikka (Chutta) Pre. 12. Khira (Cua) Imp. 14. Khetta (Jala) Past. 16. Gāņa (Guñja) Pre.
70
· Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #94

17. Poṭṭala (Luḍha) Imp. 19. Bhaya (Khaya) Fu. 21. Rajja (Cukka) Pre. 23. Dhanna (Uga) Fu. 25. Lakkuda (Jala) Pre. 27. Poṭṭala (Ludha) Fu. 29. Vana (Khaya) Past. 31. Vimana (Uḍḍa) Pre. 33. Nayarajana (Pala) Imp. 35. Sutta (Tuṭṭa) Pre. 37. Nayarajaṇa (Kulla) Imp. 39. Majja (Nassa) Imp.
Example : -
1. Vimāṇāim/Vimāṇāim/Vimāṇāṇi
Uddantu/Uḍdentu.
(C) (i) In the following a-ending Neuter Nouns and two Verbs in brackets are given. For making sentences, use a-ending Neuter Nouns in the Nominative case Plural Number, choose any one Verb for adding the suffixes of the Absolutive or Infinitive to it, and add the suffixes of the Present Tense or the Past Tense to the other Verb. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms, Verbal forms and Participles.
1. Dhanna (Uga, Vaḍḍha) 3. Gāņa (Guñja, Phura) 5. Rajja (Pasara, Jujjha) 7. Bia (Uga, Vaddha) 9. Vattha (Gala, Khaya)
18. Patta (Sukkha) Pre. 20. Nayarajaṇa (Khijja) Fu. 22. Sokkha (Vaddha) Imp. 24. Nayarajana (Ceṭṭha) Pre. 26. Vana (Soha) Fu. 28. Dhanna (Uga) Imp. 30. Bhaya (Nassa) Imp. 32. Sāsana (Pasara) Imp. 34. Vimāṇa (Uḍḍa) Fu. 36. Vattha (Jala) Pre. 38. Khetta (Nassa) Pre. 40. Bia (Uga) Fu.
Präkrta Exercise Book

2. Nayarajana (Cukka, Khijja) 4. Pottala (Ludha, Pada) 6. Vimana (Paḍa, Nassa) 8. Nayarajana (Kudda, Palā) 10. Nayarajana (Harisa, Vijja)

71

Page #95

Example: - 1. Dhannaim/
Dhannais/ Dhannāņi
Ugiūņa/Ugiūņas/ Ugidūņa/Ugidūņam/ Ugiuṁ/Ugiya/Ugitta
Vaddhia.
(C) (ii) In the following a-ending Neuter Nouns and two Verbs in
brackets are given. For making sentences, use a-ending Neuter Nouns in the Nominative case Plural Number, choose any one Verb for adding the suffixes of the Absolutive or Infinitive to it, and add the suffixes of the Imperative to the other Verb. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms, Verbal forms and Participles.
1. Nayarajana (Ņacca, Uttha) 2. Vasaņa (Chutta, Ņassa) 3. Bhaya (Nassa, Pala) . 4. Gāņa (Guñja, Pasara) 5. Vimāņa (Chittha, Vậda) 6. Nayarajaņa (Jagara, Cettha) 7. Såsana (Vaddha, Pasara) 8. Dhanna (Uga, Soha) 9. Veragga (Vasa, Pasara) 10. Khira (Cua, Pasara)
Example: - 1. Ņayarajaņāim/ Naccius/Nacceum/
Ņayarajaņāiñ/ Naccidum/Nacceduṁ/ Utthantu/Utthentu. Ņayarajaņāņi Naccittae/Naccettae
(C) (iii) In the following a-ending Neuter Nouns and two Verbs in
brackets are given. For making sentences, use a-ending Neuter Nouns in the Nominative case Plural Number, choose any one Verb for adding the suffixes of the Absolutive or Infinitive to it, and add the suffixes of the Future Tense to the other Verb. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms, Verbal forms and Participles.
1. Vimāņa (Ciţtha, Udda) 3. Gāņa (Guñja, Phura)
2. Nayarajaņa (Țha, Vijja) 4. Riņa (Chusta, Ņassa)
72
Pråksta Exercise Book

Page #96

5. Sutta (Gala, Tuṭṭa)
6. Bia (Vaddha, Uga)
7. Lakkuda (Jala, Ņassa)
8. Gāma (Soha, Pasara)
9. Nayarajana (Jagara, Ceṭṭha) 10. Vasana (Chutta, Nassa)
Example: -
Vimanȧim/
Vimāṇāim/
Vimāṇāņi
Example: -
Citthiūna/Citthiūnam/ Uddihinti/Uddihinte/
Citthiduna/Citthium/
Uddihiire/Uḍdissanti/
Citthiduṇam/Citthiya/ Uddissante/Uddissaire/ Uddissinti/Udḍissinte/
(D) In the following a-ending Nouns are given alongwith Caseendings. Point out the Person, Number, Original Noun, Gender and Case-ending in each of following Nouns.
1. Dhaṇāim
4. Pattǎim
7. Nayarajaṇāim
10. Vasaṇāim
13. Bhoyaṇāim
16. Biäim
19. Poṭṭalaim
22. Vatthaim
25. Dhanaim
28. Potṭalāņi
1. Dhaṇaim
Citthitta

Pråkrta Exercise Book
2. Khettäni
5. Lakkuḍāni
8. Rajjäim
11. Rattani
14. Khirani
17. Sāsaṇāiṁ
20. Chikkani
23. Kammāņi
26. Sasanaim
29. Chikkaim
Uddissiire.
Third Person
Person Number Original
Noun
Plural Dhana
3. Sāsaṇāim
6. Sokkhaim
12. Tinäim
15.-Suttaim
18. Ganaim
21. Dhannāim
24. Nayarajaṇāni
27. Rajjäim
30. Vatthaim

9. Bhayaim
Gender Case
ending
Neuter im-äim
73

Page #97

Exercise 17
(A) Translate the following sentences into Präkṛta. Write all the alternatives of inflected Nouns, Verbal forms and Participles.
1. The mother rejoices. 2. Faith should increase. 3. Education will spread. 4. The sister deteriorates. 5. Hunger should calm down. 6. Speech tires. 7. Wine should separate. 8. Thirst will occur. 9. The order appears. 10. The daughter should rejoice. 11. The river will dry up. 12. Wealth disappears. 13. Wisdom should succeed. 14. Desire will calm down. 15. The cave will disappear. 16. The wife fears. 17. Speech should appear. 18. Compassion separates. 19. The Ganges spreads. 20. Reputation should increase. 21. Examination occured. 22. Thirst calms down. 23. The woman should enthuse. 24. The girl will delay. 25. The sleep should occur. 26. The woman should mortify. 27. The daughter coughs. 28. Praise will spread. 29. The pit increases. 30. The Yamună will dry up. 31. Intelligence should bloom. 32. The daughter endeavours. 33. The girl will rejoice. 34. The daugher comes down. 35. Desire should vanish. 36. The night occurs to sleep. 37. The Narmada will spread. 38. Splendour should increase. 39. The daughter should breathe. 40. Sită shines. 41. Spleandour disappears. 42. Having feared, the daughter sleeps. 43. Having calmed down, the sister should sit. 44. The husband's sister will stop to go round. 45. Having whined, the daugher weeps. 46. Having increased, the education should spread. 47. Having delayed, the girl comes down. 48. Having stayed, the wife should sleep. 49. Having enthused, the woman should endeavour. 50. Desire should calm down. 51. Having deteriorated, the husband's sister sits. 52. The daugher should stop for sitting. 53. Having increased, the wealth shines. 54. Having wept, the girl delays. 55. The daughter will rejoice to play. 56. Having rejoiced, the sister will go round. 57. The girl should get up for sleeping. 58. Having coughed, the sister sleeps.
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 17, study lessons 38 to 39 of "Prākṛta Grammar and Composition".
74

Präkrta Exercise Book

Page #98

Examples: 1. The mother rejoices - Māyā
Harisai/Harisei/Harisael Harisadi/Harisedi/Harisade. Sijjhau/Sijjheu/ Sijjhadu/Sijjhedu.
= Pannā
13. Wisdom should
Succeed
= Parikkha Hosi/Hohi/Hohia.
21. Examination
occurred 35.Desire should
Vanish
= Tanhã
Khayau/Khayadu/ Khayeu/Khayedu.
(B) In the following å-ending Feminine Nouns and Verbs in
brackets are given. Form sentences by using a-ending Feminine Nouns in Nominative case Singular Number according to the Tenses as directed. Write all the alternatives.
1. Ganga (Pasara) Pre. 2. Jáă (Biha) Pre. 3. Saddhā (Vaddha) Imp. 4. Sikkhả (Pasara) Fu. 5. Vāyā (Thakka) Pre. 6. Paņņā (Sijjha) Imp. 7. Karuņă (Phura) Fu. 8. Kamala (Ho) Pre. 9. Dhūā (Harisa) Imp. 10. Sasă (Chajja) Pre. 11. Icchå (Uvasama) Fu. 12. Māya (Ullasa) Past. 13. Vāyā (Phura) Imp. 14. Parikkha (Hava) Fut. 15. Dhūá (Chubbha) Pre. 16. Mahila (Ucchaha) Imp. 17. Kannā (Cirava) Fu. 18. Nidda (Vaddha) Imp. 19. Suya (Khasa) Pre. 20. Mahilă (Cettha) Imp. 21. Saria (Sukkha) Past. 22. Gadda (Vaddha) Pre. 23. Mehā (Viasa) Imp. 24. Taņayā (Biha) Pre. 25. Nanandă (Gadayada) Fu. 26. Tanhā (Hu) Imp. 27. Dhua (Uvarama) Pre. 28. Suyā (Ussasa) Imp.
Prakrta Exercise Book
75

Page #99

29. Guhā (Nassa) Fu. 31. Mairă (Chusta) Imp. 33. Siya (Sijjha) Pre. 35. Jarà (Vaddha) Pre. 37. Kaha (Hava) Fu. 39. Sanjhā (Ho) Fu.
30. Soha (Khaya) Pre. 32. Paittha (Vaddha) Imp. 34. Áņā (Phura) Pre. 36. Jaunā (Sukkha) Fu. 38. Kalasiya (Cua) Pre. 40. Nisā (Hava) Pre.
Example: - 1. Gangå Pasarai/Pasarei/Pasarael
Pasaradi/Pasarade/Pasaredi.
(C) (i) In the following å-ending Feminine Nouns and two Verbs
in brackets are given. For making sentences, use a-ending Feminine Nouns in the Nominative case Singular Number, choose any one Verb for adding the suffixes of the Absolutive or Infinitive to it, and add the suffixes of the Present Tense or the Past Tense to the other Verb. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms, Verbal forms and Participles.
1. Suya (Biha, Loțţa) 2. Nananda (Gadayada, Ruva) 3. Kaņņā (Cirava, Kimsa) 4. Dhúă (Ruva, Khañja) 5. Maya (Gadayada, Uavasama) 6. Kaņņå (Uvasama, Uvavisa) 7. Sasă (Khasa, Uvarama) 8. Mahila (Chajja, Kudda) 9. Jää (Ussasa, Thambha) 10. Jhumpaņā (Vasa, Ho)
Example: 1. Suya
Lottia.
Bihiūņa/Bihiūņam/Bihium/Bihiya/ Bihidūņa/Bihidūņam/Bihitta
(C) (ii) In the following å-ending Feminine Nouns and two Verbs
in brackets are given. For making sentences, use a-ending Feminine Nouns in the Nominative case Singular Number, choose any one Verb for adding the suffixes of the Absolutive
76
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #100

or Infinitive to it, and add the suffixes of the Imperative to the other Verb. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms, Verbal forms and Participles.
1. Sasă (Uvasama, Uvavisa) 2. Sikkhā (Vaḍḍha, Pasara) 4. Mahila (Ucchaha, Ceṭṭha)
3. Jaa (Ciṭṭha, Loṭṭa)
5. Tanha (Jagga, Uvasama) 6. Taṇayā (Uvavisa, Thambha)
7. Kannā (Lotta, Uttha) 9. Sasa (Harisa, Uttara)
8. Kamalā (Vaddha, Soha) 10. Dhua (Thambha, Kila)
Example:
1. Sasă
Uvasamium/Uvasameum/ Uvasamidum/Uvasamedum
(C) (iii) In the following a-ending Feminine Nouns and two Verbs in brackets are given. For making sentences, use â-ending Feminine Nouns in the Nominative case Singular Number, choose any one Verb for adding the suffixes of the Absolutive or Infinitive to it, and add the suffixes of the Future Tense to the other Verb. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms, Verbal forms and Participles.
1. Dhua (Thambha, Ciṭṭha) 2. Suya (Kila, Harisa)
3. Jāā (Biha, Pala)
5. Sasa (Harisa, Ghuma) 7. Kanṇā (Cirava, Cittha) 9. Karuna (Soha, Phura)
Example: -
1. Dhúȧ
Thambhiūna/Thambhiūnam/ Thambhium/Thambhiya/ Thambhitta/Thambhidūņa/
Thambhidūņaṁ
Uvavisau/Uvavisadu/ Uvaviseu/Uvavisedu.
Prakrta Exercise Book

4. Mahila (Cukka, Khijja) 6. Naṇandă (Khañja, Kudda) 8. Jhumpaḍā (Vasa, Ho) 10. Māyā (Loṭṭa, Ceṭṭha)
Citthihii/Citthihie/ Citthihidi/Citthihide/ Citthissai/Citthissae/ Citthissadi/Citṭhissade/ Citthissidi/Citthisside.

77

Page #101

(D) In the following å-ending Nouns are given alongwith Case
endings. Point out their Person, Number, Original Noun, Gender and Case-ending in each of the following Nouns.
2. Sasă 5. Vậtã 8. Bhukkha
11. Maira
1. Parikkha 4. Karunā
7. Ņammaya 10. Guha 13. Mahila 16. Kaha 19. Tanha 22. Saria
14. Tisa 17. Ganga 20. Soha 23. Nananda 26. Ņidda. 29. Saddha
3. Māyā 6. Āņā
9. Kalasiyā 12. Dhūá 15. Nisā 18. Iccha 21. Jhumpada 24. Siya 27. Pasaṁsá 30. Mehā
25. Jara
28. Jāa
Example
Person
Number Original Gender Case Noun
ending Singular Parikkha Feminine 0
1. Parikkha
Third Person
78
Präkrta Exercise Book

Page #102

Exercise 18
(A) Translate the following sentences into Pråkęta. Write all the
alternatives of inflected Nouns, Verbal forms and Participles.
1. Mothers rejoice. 2. Educations will spread. 3. Sisters deteriorate. 4. Desires will calm down. 5. Daughters should rejoice. 6. Caves will disappear. 7. Wives fear. 8. Examinations will occur. 9. Women should enthuse. 10. Girls will delay. 11. Daughters cough. 12. Women should mortify. 13. Ditches increase. 14. Daughters sleep. 15. Daughters will rejoice. 16. Husband's sisters come down. 17. Daughters should breathe. 18. Mothers sit. 19. Speeches succeed. 20. Huts shine. 21. Examinations occur. 2 2. Daughters sit. 23. Rivers dry up. 24. Women endeavour. 25. Speeches should manifest. 26. Sisters will stay. 27. Having played, the daughters will rejoice. 28. Sisters quarreled for playing. 29. Having run away, the girls tire. 30. Having rejoiced, the mothers should live. 31. Having tired, the women should sleep. 32. Having danced, the daughters will tire. 33. Having calmed down, the sisters should sit. 34. Having rejoiced, the daughters will stay. 35. Having increased, the education should spread. 36. Having feared, the girls come down. 37. Having tired, the daughters weep. 38. Having slept, the mothers calm down. 39. Wives should stay to sleep. 40. Having enthused, the women should endeavour. 41. Desires should calm down. 42. Having feared, the daughters sleep. 43. Husband's sisters will get up to go round. 44. Having stoped, the daughters should sit. 45. Having wept, the girls delay. 46. Having coughed, the sisters sit. 47. Daughters weep to sleep. 48. Mothers should endeavour to live. 49. Daughters will rejoice to play. 50. Having danced, the daughters tire. 51. Having calmed down, the mothers should sit. 52. Having slept, the sisters should get up. 53. Husband's sisters should go round to tire. 54. Sisters should endeavour for waking up. 55. Girls will get up to sleep. 56. Daughters endeavour for danceing. 57. Having rejoiced, the
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 18, study lesson 40 of “Prākļta Grammar and Composition”.
Prakrta Exercise Book
79

Page #103

sisters will go round. 58. Daughters will jump for playing. 59. Having fainted, the demons die. 60. Sisters should stop to go round.
Examples:
1. Mothers rejoice = Māyā/Māyāo/
Māyāu
Jāyā/Jāyāu/
Jāyāo
12. Women should =
mortify
28. Sisters quarreled - Sasa/Sasau/
for playing
Sasão
40. Having enthused, the women should endeavour = Itthi/ Itthia/ Ucchahiŭna/Ucchahiūnam/ Ucchahidūņa/Ucchahidūṇam/
Itthiu/Itthio
Ucchahiya/Ucchahium/
80
Ucchahittä
1. Dhua (Jambha) Pre. 3. Sikkha (Pasara) Fu. 5. Suyȧ (Joha) Imp. 7. Parikkha (Hava) Fu. 9. Sasă (Thambha) Fu. 11. Kanna (Palā) Past. 13. Māyā (Uvasama) Pre. 15. Jāa (Uvavisa) Imp. 17. Saria (Sukkha) Fu.
Harisanti/Harisenti/ Harisante/Harisire.
Tavantu/Taventu.

Khelium/Khelidum/ Jujjhia. Kheleum/Kheledum/
Khelittae/Khelettae
(B) In the following a-ending Feminine Nouns and Verbs in brackets are given. Form sentences by using a-ending Feminine Nouns in Nominative case Plural Number according to the Tenses as directed. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms and Verbal forms.
Ceṭṭhantu/ Ceṭṭhentu.
2. Mahila (Harisa) Imp. 4. Māyā (Harisa) Pre. 6. Jhumpaḍa (Soha) Pre. 8. Taṇaya (Khasa) Pre. 10. Naṇandă (Ussasa) Fu. 12. Väyȧ (Phura) Imp. 14. Guha (Khaya) Fu. 16. Vāyā (Sijjha) Pre. 18. Iccha (Uvasama) Imp.

Präkrta Exercise Book

Page #104

19. Suyà (Gadayaļa) Pre. 20. Kalasiyā (Ludha) Pre. 21. Māyā (Cettha) Imp. 22. Sasă (Jujjha) Fu. 23. Jáā (Jagara) Imp. 24. Kaņņā (Chajja) Past. 25. Nanandă (Cirava) Fu. 26. Parikkha (Hava) Pre. 27. Kaņņā (Uvavisa) Fu. 28. Suya (Biha) Fu. 29. Māyā (Khijja) Pre. 30. Dhūă (Kanda) Pre. 31. Taņayā (Khañja) Imp. 32. Saria (Sukkha) Pre. 33. Iccha (Vaddha) Pre. 34. Kalasiya (Tutta) Fu. 35. Sasa (Harisa) Imp. 36. Suya (Thambha) Imp. 37. Mahila (Vijja) Fu. 38. Kaņņā (Khimsa) Pre. 39. Nanandă (Cukka) Pre. 40. Dhūá (Ucchaha) Imp.
Example: - 1. Dhūã/Dhūáu/Dhúão Jambhanti/ Jambhantel
Jambhäire.
(C) (i) In the following å-ending Feminine Nouns and two Verbs
in brackets are given. For making sentences, use å-ending Feminine Nouns in the Nominative case Plural Number, choose any one Verb for adding the suffixes of the Absolutive or Infinitive to it, and add the suffixes of the Present Tense or the Past Tense to the other Verb. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms, Verbal forms and Participles.
1. Sasă (Kila, Țhå)
2. Kaņņă (Biha, Cittha) 3. Dhūā (Jujjha, Kanda) 4. Māya (Ruva, Uvasama) 5. Suyā (Biha, Lotta) 6. Naņandă (Chajja, Kanda) 7. Taņaya (Kanda, Ciråva) 8. Mahila (Thambha, Uvavisa) 9. Jhumpada (Vasa, Ho) 10. Kannā (Nacca, Thakka)
Example :1. Sasă/Sasko/Sasku Kīlium/Kileum/ Thāhi/Thāhia/
Kilidum/Kiledur Thåsi.
Prakrta Exercise Book
81

Page #105

(C) (ii) In the following å-ending Feminine Nouns and two Verbs
in brackets are given. For making sentences, use a-ending Feminine Nouns in the Nominative case Plural Number, choose any one Verb for adding the suffixes of the Absolutive or Infinitive to it, and add the suffixes of the Imperative to the other Verb. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms, Verbal forms and Participles.
1. Māyā (Harisa, Jiva) 2. Jāā (Lotta, Cittha) 3. Sasă (Jägara, Ceţtha) 4. Naņandă (Thakka, Ghuma) 5. Suya (Thambha, Uvavisa) 6. Tanha (Chutta, Uvasama) 7. Sikkhā (Vaddha, Pasara) 8. Māyā (Ucchaha, Cettha) 9. Sasă (Uvasama, Uvavisa) 10. Dhủà (Rama, Kila)
Example: -- 1. Māya/Mayão/
Mayau
Jivantu/ Jiventu.
Harisiūna/Harisiūnam/ Harisidūna/Harisidūnam/ Harisium/Harisiya/ Harisitta
(C) (iii) In the following å-ending Feminine Nouns and two Verbs
in brackets are given. For making sentences, use a-ending Feminine Nouns in the Nominative case Plural Number, choose any one Verb for adding the suffixes of the Absolutive or Infinitive to it, and add the suffixes of the Future Tense to the other Verb. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms, Verbal forms and Participles.
1. Kannå (Loțţa, Vţtha) 3. Dhūá (Kila, Rama) 5. Guha (Jala, Ņassa) 7. Jāā (Biha, Pala) 9. Jhumpadă (Vasa, Ho}
2. Sasă (Harisa, Ghuma) 4. Sikkhā (Vaddha, Pasara) 6. Suya (Kanda, Ciţtha) 8. Mahilā (Jagara, Uttha) 10. Nanandā (Joha, Kanda)
82
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #106

Example: Kaņņā/Kaņņão/ Loțțiủņa/Loțțiūņam/ Utthihinti/Utthihintel Kaņņău Loțțidūņa/Loțțidūņam/ Utthihiire/Utthissanti/
Loțțium/Lottiya/ Utthissante/Utthissaire/ Loțțittā
Utthissinti/Utthissintel Utthissiire.
(D) In the following a-ending Nouns are given alongwith Case
endings. Point out the Person, Number, Original Noun, Gender and Case -ending in each of the following Nouns. 1. Siya 2. Parikkha
3. Māyāo 4. Kahāu 5. Tanayão
6. Iccha 7. Gangão
8. Nanandáu 9. Mahilão 10. Nisầu 11. Saria
12. Sikkha 13. Jhumpadão 14. Kalasiya 15. Gaddau 16. Jāàu 17. Guhão
18. Kannau 19. Pasaṁsão 20. Dhūão
21. Mahilau 22. Siyão
23. Jhumpaļā 24. Sasā 25. Suyão 26. Vāyão
27. Sariāu 28. Maya
29. Sikkhão 30. Nisão
Example
1. Siya
Person Number Original Gender Case Noun
ending Third Singular/ Siya Feminine 0 Person Plural
Prakrta Exercise Book
83

Page #107

(A) Translate the following sentences into Prākṛta. Write all the alternatives of inflected Nouns, Verbal forms and Participles.
Exercise 19
84
1. The camel sits. 2. The aircraft may fly. 3. Examination will occur. 4. The dog barks. 5. The government should spread. 6. Girls will dance. 7. Books shine. 8. Pleasure should increase. 9. The sister plays. 10. The king should rejoice. 11. The small bundle falls down. 12. The small earthen water pots break. 13. The grandson should rejoice. 14. Citizens will wake up. 15. Wealth increases. 16. Clouds thunder. 17. Detachment should increase. 18. Desires will calm down. 19. The cloth dries up. 20. Beauty will bloom. 21. Education will spread. 22. The maternal uncle should get up. 23. Water drops. 24. Rivers willdry up. 25. Disgrace spreads. 26. Suffering should vanish. 27. Caves disappeared. 28. Vows shine. 29. Knowledge should succeed. 30. Sisters will stay. 31. The son trembles. 32. Moral conduct shines. 33. Thirst will occur. 34. Demons should die. 35. Seeds will grow. 36. Women should enthuse. 37. Lions run away. 38. The truth should bloom. 39. Speech tires. 40. Having jumped, the demons die. 41. The citizen will endeavour to wake up. 42. The daughter rejoices. 43. Having wept, the children will sleep. 44. Having stayed, the aircraft will fly. 45. Desire should calm down. 46. Having risen, the sun shines. 47. Men should endeavour for living. 48. Daughters will rejoice for playing. 49. Having tired, the maternal uncles sit. 50. Having burnt, the thread disappears. 51. Having delayed, the girl comes down. 52. Having fallen, the jewel will break. 53. The state quarrels to spread. 54. Having stayed, the daughter will get up. 55. Having burnt, the books disappear. 56. Having endeavoured, the citizens should play. 57. Having rejoiced, the sister will go round. 58. Having feared, the serpents ran away. 59. Mothers should endeavour to live.
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 19, study lessons 30 to 40 of "Prākṛta Grammar and Composition".

Prākṛta Exercise Book

Page #108

Examples:
1. The camel sits
37. Lions run away
45. Desire should calm down
= Karaho
17.Detachment should Veraggam
increase
27. Caves disappeared = Guha/Guhau/
Guhão
= Sihä
= Tanha
Pråkrta Exercise Book

Acchai/Acchei/Acchae/ Acchadi/Acchade.
Vaddhau/Vadḍheu/ Vaddhadu/Vadḍhedu. Nassia.
58. Having feared, the serpents ran away=
Sappā
Palanti/Palante/Palaire.
Uvasamau/Uvasamadu/ Uvasameu/Uvasamedu.
1. Kukkura (Bukka) Pre. 3. Sikkha (Pasara) Fu. 5. Lakkuda (Jala) Imp. 7. Parikkha (Hava) Fu. 9. Putta (Kudda) Past. 11. Khira (Cua) Imp. 13. Ghara (Paḍa) Pre. 15. Mehā (Viasa) Fu. 17. Rajja (Ceṭṭha) Imp. 19. Maula (Palà) Pre. 21. Kamala (Soha) Pre. 23. Veragga (Vaḍdha) Imp.
Dariuna/Dariuṇam/Daridūṇa/ Palāsi/Palāhi/ Daridūṇam/Darium/ Palāhia. Dariya/Darittā
(B) In the following Nouns and Verbs in brackets are given. Form sentences in any Number by using Tense as directed. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms and Verbal forms.
2. Patta (Sukkha) Imp. 4. Potta (Nacca) Pre. 6. Iccha (Uvasama) Fu. 8. Vattha (Sukkha) Imp. 10. Māyā (Thambha) Fu. 12. Vaya (Gala) Pre. 14. Sasana (Pasara) Imp. 16. Meha (Gajja) Pre. 18. Kannā (Cirȧva) Fu. 20. Jovvana (Viasa) Pre. 22. Dukkha (Gala) Imp. 24. Pannā (Sijjha) Imp.

85

Page #109

25. Huavaha (Jala) Fu. 26. Rajja (Ucchaha) Fu. 27. Tisā (Uvasama) Fu. 28. Mehå (Viasa) Pre. 29. Vimāņa (Udda) Past. 30. Agama (Soha) Imp. 31. Vāyā (Sijjha) Pre. 32. Nayarajaņa (Cettha) Imp. 33. Mahilā (Ucchaha) Imp. 34. Nara (Ujjama) Fu. 35. Bia (Uga) Fu.
36. Guha (Nassa) Fu. 37. Avayasa (Pasara) Pre. 38. Sila (Soha) Imp. 39. Sasă (Cittha) Fu.. 40. Karaha (Nacca) Pre.
Example: - 1. Kukkuro Bukkai/Bukkae/Bukkadi/Bukkade.
(C) (i) In the following Nouns and two Verbs in brackets are given.
For making sentences use Nouns in the Nominative case Singular Number or Plural Number, choose any one Verb for adding the suffixes of the Absolutive or Infinitive to it, and add the suffixes of the Present Tense or the Past Tense to the other Verb. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms, Verbal forms and Participles.
1. Kukkura (Bukka, Uvavisa) 2. Salila (Cua, Pasara) 3. Sasă (Khasa, Uttha) 4. Nara (Uppajja, Mara) 5. Gāņa (Guñja, Phura) 6. Suyā (Lotta, Kanda) 7. Diara (Vala, Uvavisa) 8. Nara (Uttha, Uvavisa) 9. Jhumpaļā (Vasa, Ho) 10. Vasaņa (Chuțța, Ņassa)
Example: -
Bukkiūna/Bukkiūnam/ 1. Kukkură Bukkidūņa/Bukkidūņam/
Bukkiya/Bukkium/Bukkitta
Uvavisia.
86
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #110

(C) (ii) In the following Nouns and two Verbs in brackets are
given. For making sentences use Nouns in the Nominative case Singular Number or Plural Number, choose any one Verb for adding the suffixes of the Absolutive or Infinitive to it, and add the suffixes of the Imperative to the other Verb. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms, Verbal forms and Participles. 1. Rahunandana (Harisa, Accha) 2. Rajja (Pasara, Soha) 3. Gāņa (Guñja, Phura) 4. Mahila (Ucchaha, Cettha) 5. Gama (Vasa, Pasara) 6. Vasaņa (Chutta, Ņassa) 7. Bappa (Hasa, Jiva) . 8. Divāyara (Soha, Uga) 9. Saså (Uvasama, Uvavisa) 10. Sikkhā (Vaddha, Pasara)
Example :
1. Rahuộandaņo
Harisiúņa/Harisiūņam/ Acchau/Accheu/ Harisidūņa/Harisidūņam/ Acchadu/Acchedu. Harisiya/Harisium/ Harisitta
(C) (iii) In the following Nouns and two Verbs in brackets are
given. For making sentences use Nouns in the Nominative case Singular Number or Plural Number, choose any one Verb for adding the suffixes of the Absolutive or Infinitive to it, and add the suffixes of the Future Tense to the other Verb. Write all the alternatives of Noun forms, Verbal forms and Participles. 1. Sutta (Gala, Tutta) 2. Rayana (Paļa, Tuțţa) 3. Vimāņa (sha, Udda) 4. Dhūá (Thambha, Cittha) 5. Suya (Khela, Rama) 6. Sasa (Harisa, Kila) 7. Ghara (Pada, Ņassa) 8. Udaga (Sukkha, Nijjhara) 9. Gantha (Jala, Ņassa) 10. Mahila (Ucchaha, Ceţtha)
Prakrta Exercise Book
87

Page #111

Example: 1. Suttaṁ
(D) In the following Nouns are given alongwith Case-endings. Point out the Person, Number, Original Noun, Gender and Case-ending in each of the following Nouns.
1. Sokkhaim
4. Vimāṇāņi
7. Rajjāim
10. Lakkuḍam
13. Sāsaṇāiṁ
16. Chikkaṁ
19. Vatthaim
22. Bhoyanaṁ
25. Khettam
28. Udagam
Example -
1. Sokkhaim
88
Galiúna/Galiūnaṁ/ Tuttihii/Tuttihie/ Galidūņa/Galidūṇam/ Tuṭṭihidi/Tuṭṭihide/ Galiya/Galium/
Tuttissai/Tuttissae/
Tuttissadi/Tuttissade/ Tuttissidi/Tuttisside.
Galittä

2. Sasão
5. Taṇayāu
8. Māyā
11. Mehão
14. Parikkhȧ
17. Suyão
20. Āṇā
23. Rāyā
26. Karunão
29. Sāyară
Person
Third Person
3. Putto
6. Vayā
9. Sappo
12. Āgamo
15. Paramesaro
18. Rayaṇāim
21. Avayaso
24. Saria
27. Bhavo
30. Dhaṇāim
Number Original Gender Case
Noun
ending
Plural Sokkha Neuter
im äim

Präkrta Exercise Book

Page #112

Exercise 20
(A-1) Change the following Verbs into the Past Participle.
Afterwards, add the suffixes of the a-ending Masculine Nouns in Nominative Singular.
1. Hasa 4. Rūsa 7. Jiva
2. Saya 5. Lukka 8. Kanda
3. Ņacca 6. Jagga 9. Harisa
Example Past
According to a-ending Masculine Nouns Participle Nominative Singular Hasa Hasia/Hasiya Hasio/Hasiyo/
Hasita/Hasida Hasito/Hasido (A-2) Change the following Verbs into the Past Participle.
Afterwards, add the suffixes of the a-ending Neuter Nouns in Nominative Singular. 1. Vaddha 2. Viasa
3. Guñja 4. Kudda 5. Jāgara
6. Vijja 7. Chutta 8. Vasa
9. Cukka
Example
Past
Vaddha
Participle Vaddhial Vaddhiya/ Vaddhita/ Vaļļhida
According to a-ending NeuterNouns Nominative Singular Vaddhiaṁ/ Vaddhiyam/ Vaddhitam/ Vaddhidam
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 20, study lesson 42 of “Prakrta Grammar and Composition”.
Prakrta Exercise Book
89

Page #113

(A-3) Change the following Verbs into the Past Participle. Afterwards, add the suffixes of the a-ending Masculine
Nouns in Nominative Plural.
1. Nacca
4. Soha
7. Thã
Example -
Nacca
Example -
Viasa
Past
Participle
Naccia/
90
Nacciya/
Naccita/
Naccida
1. Viasa
4. Khāsa
7. Uttara
(A-4) Change the following Verbs into the Past Participle. Afterwards, add the suffixes of the a-ending Neuter Nouns
in Nominative Plural.
Past
Participle
Viasia
2. Khaya
5. Sukkha
8. Bukka
1. Uttha
4. Lajja
7. Mara

According to a-ending Masculine Nouns
Nominative Plural
Naccia/
Nacciya/
Naccita/
Naccidā
3. Jala
6. Pală
9. Uga
2. Ho
5. Uvasama
8. Tuṭṭa
(A-5) Change the following Verbs into the Past Participle. Afterwards, change them into the Feminine by making them a-ending. Thereafter add the suffixes of a-ending Feminine Nouns in the Nominative Singular.
3. Uvavisa
6. Thambha
9. Udda
According to a-ending Neuter Nouns Nominative Plural
Viasiaim/Viasiāim/Viasiāņi
2. Thā
5. Accha
8. Khela
3. Hasa
6. Nijjhara
9. Kulla

Präkrta Exercise Book

Page #114

Example -
Past
Participle
Uttha Utthia/Utthiya Uṭṭhiä/Uṭṭhiya/ Utthita/Utthida Utthita/Uṭṭhida
1. Jagga
4. Pasara
7. Hava
(A-6) Change the following Verbs into the Past Participle. Afterwards, change them into the Feminine by making them ȧ-ending. Thereafter add the suffixes of å-ending Feminine Nouns in the Nominative Plural.
Example -
Past
Participle
å-ending
Form
Jagga Jaggia/
Jaggiya/
Jaggita/
Jaggida
2. Chajja
5. Thambha
8. Ucchaha

å-ending
Form
Jaggia/
Jaggiyȧ/
Jaggitȧ/
Jaggida
According to â-ending
Feminine Nouns Nominative Singular Utthia/Utthiya/
Utthita/Uṭṭhidă
3. Biha
6. Ussasa
9. Ceṭṭha
According to ā-ending
Feminine Nouns
Nominative Plural
Jaggia/Jaggiau/
Jaggião/Jaggiya/
Jaggiyǎu/Jaggiyão/
Jaggita/Jaggitȧu/
Jaggitão/Jaggida/ Jaggidau/Jaggidão
(B) Translate the following sentences into Prākṛta. Make Past Participles and add the suffixes of a-ending Nouns (Mas. and Neu.) and those of a-ending Nouns (Fem.) in accordance with the Gender and Number of the subject (Noun and Personal Pronoun) Write all the alternatives.
1. The king laughed. 2. The son got up. 3. The vow disappeared. 4. The jewel fell. 5. Fire burned. 6. Disgrace spread. 7. The book shined. 8. The child wept. 9. Hanumana Jumped. 10. The demon Präkrta Exercise Book

91

Page #115

died. 11. Clouds thundered. 12. Kings laughed. 13. Sons got up. • 14. Vows disappeared. 15. Jewels fell. 16. Cloths dried up.
17. Villages shined. 18. Grandsons sat. 19. Aircrafts flied. 20. The government spread. 21. Kingdom increased. 22. The small bundle fell down. 23. Moral conduct appeared. 24. Beauty bloomed. 25. Wood burned. 26. The forest ended. 27. The head ached. 28. The truth bloomed. 29. Aircrafts flied. 30. Papers dried up. 31. Pleasures increased. 32. Kingdoms increased. 33. Woods burned. 34. Addictions separated. 35. Cloths dried up. 36. Threads broke. 37. Songs shined. 38. Fields shined. 39. Examination occurred. 40. The sister stoped. 41. The hut shined. 42. Education spread. 43. The river dried up. 44. The daughter slept. 45. The Yamunā spread. 46. The wife feared. 47. The daughter stayed. 48. Praise spread. 49. Daughters sat. 50. Examinations occurred. 51. Sisters stoped. 52. Education spread. 53. Daughters slept. 54. Daughters woke up. 55. Rivers dried up. 56. Desires increased. 57. Huts shined. 58. Caves disappeared. 59. I woke up. 60. He stayed. 61. You rejoiced. 62.1 (Fem) sat. 63. You slept. 64. She laughed. 65. I (Mas.) ran away. 66. He turned. 67. You got up. 68. He played. 69. We all woke up. 70. They all stayed. 71. You all rejoiced. 72. We both sat. 73. You all slept. 74. They all jumped. 75. We both ran away. 76. They both turned. 77. You both sat. 78. They all played.
Examples - 1. The King laughed: Narindo
Hasio/Hasiyo/ Hasito/Hasido.
23. Moral conduct - Sila
appeared
Phuriam/Phuriyam/ Phuritar/Phuridań.
41. The hut shined:
Jhumpada
Chajjiä/Chajjiya/Chajjitā/ Chajjida.
92
Praksta Exercise Book

Page #116

56.Desires increased= Icchă/
Icchāu/ Icchão
Vaddhia/Vaddhiāu/ Vaddhião/Vaddhiya/ Vaddhiyāu/Vaddhiyão/ Vaddhitā/Vaddhitāu/ Vaddhitão/Vaddhidă/ Vaddhidāu/Vaddhidão.
69. We all woke up = Amhe/
Vayam
Jaggia/Jaggiya/ Jaggitā/Jaggidā.
(C-1) Use the following Masculine Nouns in the Nominative
Singular or the Nominative Plural and change the verbs given in brackets into Past Participles, and then make sentences by adding any one suffix of the Absolutive or the Infinitive to the Verbs given in the middle. Write all the alternatives of inflected Nouns and Past Participles.
1. Kukkura, Bukka (Accha) 2. Putta, Biha (Kanda) 3. Gantha, Jala (Nassa) 4. Mitta, Harisa (Jiva) 5. Potta, Nacca (Uttha) 6. Rayana, Pada (Tutta) 7. Máula, Jāgara (Dula) 8. Karaha, Thakka (Ņacca) 9. Duha, Gala (Nassa) 10. Vaya, Tutta (Gala)
Example 1. Kukkuro
Bukkiūņa
Acchio/Acchiyo/ Acchito/Acchido.
(C-2) Use the following Neuter Nouns in the Nominative
Singular or the Nominative Plural and change the verbs given in brackets into Past Participles, and then make sentences by adding any one suffix of the Absolutive or the Infinitive to the Verbs given in the middle. Write all the alternatives of inflected Nouns and Past Participles. 1. Vimāņa, Udda(Thambha) 2. Sāsaņa, Pasara (Vaddha)
Prakrta Exercise Book
93

Page #117

3. Lakkuda, Nassa (Jala) 5. Sutta, Gala (Tuṭṭa)
7. Ghaya, Cua (Pasara) 9. Bia, Uga (Vaḍdha)
Example -
1.
Vimāṇaṁ
94
Example. 1.
Uḍdium
(C-3) Use the following Feminine Nouns in the Nominative Singular or the Nominative Plural and change the verbs given in brackets into Past Participles, and then make sentences by adding any one suffix of the Absolutive or the Infinitive to the Verbs given in the middle. Write all the alternatives of inflected Nouns and Past Participles.
4. Nayarajaṇa, Kudda (Palā) 6. Pottala, Ludha (Paḍa) 8. Bhaya, Khaya (Palā) 10. Rina, Chuṭṭa (Nassa)
1. Siya, Thakka (Loṭṭa) 3. Sasa, Nacca (Thakka) 5. Taṇaya, Jujjha (Ruva)
2. Dhúa, Biha (Kanda) 4. Mahilā, Dara (Palā) 6. Jää, Uvasama (Uvavisa) 8. Jhumpaḍā, Vasa (Hava)
7. Tanha, Chuṭṭa (Nassa)
9. Pasamsa, Vaḍḍha (Pasara) 10. Kanṇā, Kudda (Ciṭṭha)
Thambhiam.
Siyä Thakkidūņa Loṭṭiä.
(C-4) Use the following Personal Pronouns in the Nominative Singular or the Nominative Plural and change the verbs given in brackets into Past Participles, and then make sentences by adding any one suffix of the Absolutive or the Infinitive to the Verbs given in the middle. Write all the alternatives of inflected Pronouns and Past Participles.

1. Ta, Nacca (Thakka)
2. Amha, Dara (Pala)
3. Tumha, Ucchaha (Ujjama) 4. Tā, Khela (Saya)
5. Ta, Mara (Kulla)
6. Amha, Cirāva (Uttara)

Präkṛta Exercise Book

Page #118

7. Tumha, Thakka (Ghuma) 9. Amha, Harisa (Kila)
Example .
1.
So
(D)
1. Hasiå
4. Tháo
7. Dukkhiyam
10. Sukkhâu
13. Galiāņi
16. Nacciam
19. Lukkião
22. Hoāim
25. Jujjhiäim
28. Ujjamiā
Example .
Nacciūnaṁ
Point out the suffix, Number, Gender and Original Verb in each of the following Past Participles.
1. Hasiå
Präkyta Exercise Book
8. Tā, Kanda (Muccha) 10. Ta, Kalaha (Lajja)
Thakkio/Thakkiyo/ Thakkito/Thakkido.
2. Viasiȧim
5. Bihião
8. Cukkiä
11. Kheliäim
14. Nassiam
17. Jivio
20. Jaggiau
23. Sayio
26. Ghumiam
29. Lajjião
3. Utthiāu
6. Thambhião
9. Kuddião
12. Uvasamião
15. Harisiä
18. Acchiaim
21. Jägariā
24. Uttarião
27. Dariäim
30. Dukkhiāni
Original Gender Number Suffix
Verb
Hasa
Plural a
Masc. Feminine Singular/ Plural

95

Page #119

Exercise 21 (A-1) Change the following Verbs into the Present Participle.
Afterwards, add the suffixes of a-ending Masculine Nouns in the Nominative Singular. 1. Hasa
2. Dara 3. Saya
4. Nacca 5. Rūsa
6. Lajja
Example Verb Present According to a-ending Participle Masculine Nouns
Nominative Singular Hasa Hasanta) Hasanto/
Hasamaņa - Hasamāņo
(A-2) Change the following Verbs into the Present Participle.
Afterwards, add the suffixes of a-ending Masculine Nouns in the Nominative Plural.
1. Hasa
3. Khaya
2. Nacca 4. Jala 6. Uvasam
5. Soha
Example
Verb
Present Participle
According to a-ending Masculine Nouns Nominative Plural Hasanta/ Hasamāna
Hasa
Hasanta/ Hasamaņa
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 21, study lesson 43 of “Prākta Grammar and Composition".
96
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #120

(A-3) Change the following Verbs into the Present Participle.
Afterwards, add the suffixes of a-ending Neuter Nouns in the Nominative Singular. 1. Vaddha
2. Viasa 3. Gunja
4. Kudda 5. Jāgara
6. Uttara
Example
Verb
Present According to a-ending Participle Neuter Nouns
Nominative Singular Vaddhantal Vaddhantaṁ/ Vaddhamana Vaddhamāņam
Vaddha
(A-4) Change the following Verbs into the Present Participle.
Afterwards, add the suffixes of a-ending Neuter Nouns in the Nominative Plural. 1. Viasa
2. Ho 3. Thambha
4. Tutta 5. Udda
6. Dara
Example
Verb
Present Participle
According to a-ending Neuter Nouns Nominative Plural Viasantaim/Viasantaiṁ/ Viasantāni/Viasamănăim/ Viasamāņāiñ/Viasamāņāņi
Viasa
Viasanta/ Viasamāņa
(A-5) Change the following Verbs into the Present Participle.
Afterwards, change them into the Feminine by making them å-ending. Thereafter add the suffixes of the å-ending Feminine Nouns in the Nominative Singular.
Praksta Exercise Book
97

Page #121

1. Ņacca 3. Lajja 5. Dula
2. Užtha 4. Hasa 6. Rūsa
Example
Verb
Present Participle
å-ending Form
According to a-ending Feminine Nouns Nominative Singular Naccantá/ Ņaccamåņa
Nacca
Naccanta/ Naccamāņa
Ņaccanta/ Ņaccamāņa
(A-6) Change the following Verbs into the Present Participle.
Afterwards, change them into the Feminine by making them å-ending. Thereafter add the suffixes of the a. ending Feminine Nouns in the Nominative Plural.
1. Saya 3. Biha 5. Cettha
2. Jagga 4. Thambha 6. Harisa
Example -
Verb
Present Participle
ā-ending Form
Saya
Sayanta/ Sayamāna
Sayantă/ Sayamaņā
According to a-ending Feminine Nouns Nominative Plural Sayantá/Sayantāu/ Sayantão/Sayamāņā/ Sayamāņāu/ Sayamāņão
(B) Translate the following sentences into Präksta. Make Present
Participle and add the suffixes of a-ending Nouns (Mas. and Neu.) and those of a-ending Nouns (Fem.) in accordance with the Gender and Number of the subject (Noun and Personal Pronoun). Write all the alternatives.
1. The embarrassing son sits. 2. The barking dog runs away. 3.
The trembling demons sit. 4. The fearing child weeps. 5. The 98
Prăkrta Exercise Book

Page #122

burning fire vanishes. 6. Dancing camels tire. 7. Increasing moral conduct blossoms. 8. The burning wood disappears. 9. Increasing detachment shines. 10. The enthusing mother sits. 1 1. Increasing reputation shines. 12. The grieving women go round. 13. Increasing faith shines. 14. Vanishing Karmas separate. 15. Embarrassing, he hides. 16. Playing, I rejoice. 17. Dancing, you tire. 18. Weeping, you all quarrel. 19. Playing, we all rejoice. 20. Quarrelling, you all fight. 21. The Laughing man should live. 22. The rejoicing father should endeavour. 23. The enthusing child should play. 24. The enthusing women should endeavour. 25. The calming down girl sits. 26. Rejoicing, you should play. 27. Rejoicing, I should dance. 28. Laughing, you all sit. 29. Running away, we all should play. 30. The succeeding truth will shine. 31. Increasing education will spread. 32. Dancing girls will tire. 33. Falling jewels will break. 34. Endeavouring men will jump. 35. The sitting grandson will turn. 36. The jumping demons will die. 37. Laughing, I (Fem.) shall live. 38. Jumping, you will tire. 39. Rejoicing, she will dance. 40. Endeavouring, we all shall wake up. 41. Calming down, they all will sit. 42. Fearing, you all hide. 43. Dripping, clarified butter fell. 44. The endeavouring grandfather sat. 45. The endeavouring friend rejoiced. 46. The fighting grandsons trembled. 47. The whining son sat. 48. Dripping, the water dried up. 49. The floundering demon died. 50. The laughing citizen lived. 51. The rejoicing daughter got up. 52. Burning grass disappeared. 53. Playing, I rejoiced. 54. Fearing, she wept. 55. Grieving, we sat. 56. Stopping, they all came down. 57. Calming down, they all sat. 58. Jumping, we all tired.
Examples.
1. The embarrassing Putto Lajjanto/
son sits
Lajjamāņo
Prakrta Exercise Book

Acchai/Acchei/ Acchae/Acchadi/
Acchade.
99

Page #123

12. The grieving women go round =
(i)
Khijjanta/ Khijjantau/
Khijjantão
Ghumire/
Khijjamānā/ Ghumenti. Khijjamāṇāu/
Khijjamāṇāo
Mahilå/
Mahilȧu/
Mahilão
(ii)
22. The rejoicing father should endeavour =
Bappo
37. Laughing, I (Fem.) shall live =
Aham/Ham/
Hasantä/
Ammi
Hasamānā
43. Dripping, clarified butter fell = Ghayam
Ullasanto/ Ujjamau/Ujjameu/
Ullasamāņo
Ujjamadu/Ujjamedu.
100
Ghumanti/
Ghumante/
56. Stopping, they all came down =
Te

Jivihimi/Jivihāmi/
Jivissȧmi/Jivissimi/
Jivehimi/Jivessāmi/
Jivehāmi/Jivissam/
Jivessaṁ.
Cuantam (i) Paḍia
Cuamāṇaṁ (ii) Paḍiam/Paditam/ Paḍidam/Padiyaṁ.
Thambhanta/ (i)
Thambhamānā (ii)
(C-1) For making sentences use the following Nouns and Pronouns as subjects in the Nominative Singular or Plural Number, and choose any one Verb from the Verbs given in brackets for changing it to Present Participle and add suffixes of the Present Tense to the other Verb.
Uttria/Uttariā
Uttariya/Uttarita/
Uttaridă.
1. Karaha (Nacca, Thakka) 2. Veragga (Vaddha, Soha) 3. Jhumpaḍā (Paḍa, Nassa) 4. Tā (Dara, Pala)
5. Amha (Kila, Harisa)
6. Tumha (Ucchaha, Ceṭṭha)
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #124

Example • 1. Karaho
Naccanto/
Naccamano
Thakkai/Thakkei/ Thakkae/Thakkadi/ Thakkade.
(C-2) For making sentences use the following Nouns and
Pronouns as subjects in the Nominative Singular or Plural Number, and choose any one Verb from the Verbs given in brackets for changing it to Present Participle and add suffixes of the Imperative to the other Verb.
1. Rajja (Vaddha, Pasara) 2. Mahilā (Ucchaha, Cettha) 3. Balaa (Ucchaha, Khela) 4. Tumha (Hasa, Accha) 5. Amha (Pala, Khela) 6. Ta (Uvasama, Uvavisa)
Example 1. Rajjaim/
Rajjain/ Rajjāņi
Vaddhantăim/ Vaddhantais/ Vaddhantāņi
Pasarantu/ Pasarentu.
(C-3) For making sentences use the following Nouns and
Pronouns as subjects in the Nominative Singular or Plural Number, and choose any one Verb from the Verbs given in brackets for changing it to Present Participle and add suffixes of the Future Tense to the other Verb. 1. Sacca (Sijjha, Soha) 2. Rakkhasa (Kulla, Mara) 3. Kannā (Nacca, Thakka) 4. Ta (Uvasama, Accha) 5. Tumha (Dara, Lukka) 6. Amha (Cettha, Jägara)
Example 1. Saccam
Sijjhantam/ Sijjhamānam
Sohihii/Sohihie/Sohihidi/ Sohihide/Sohissai/ Sohissae/Sohissadi/ Sohissade/Sohissidi/ Sohisside.
Pråksta Exercise Book
101

Page #125

(C-4) For making sentences use the following Nouns and
Pronouns as subjects in the Nominative Singular or Plural Number, and choose any one Verb from the Verbs given in brackets for changing it to Present Participle and add suffixes of the Past Participle or the Past Tense to the other Verb for expressing the purport of the Past Tense.
Example .
(D)
1. Potta (Jujjha, Kampa) 3. Suya (Harisa, Uṭṭha) 5. Tumaha (Khijja, Uvavisa)
102
Potto Jujjhanto/Jujjhamāņo Kampia/etc.
or
Potto Jujjhanto/Jujjhamāņo Kampio/etc.
Point out the suffix, Number, Gender and Original Verb in each of the following Present Participles.
1. Hasanto
4. Kuddantau
7. Chiṭṭhantă
10. Chuṭṭanto
13. Khāsantā
16. Lajjamāņo 19. Uṭṭhantă
Example -
1. Hasanto
2. Putta (Gaḍayaḍa, Ciṭṭha) 4. Tā (Dara, Kanda)
6. Amha (Kudda, Thakka)

2. Viasamāṇāni
5. Ramantão
8. Cirāvamāṇā
11. Jägarantaim 14. Phullantāu
17. Daranto
20. Thakkantaim
Original Gender
Verb
Hasa
Masculine
1
3. Vaddhantaim
6. Guñjamāṇāņi
9. Phurantȧ
12. Chuṭṭamāņo
15. Thambhamāṇāiṁ
18. Gaḍayaḍamāṇāiṁ
Number
Suffix
Singular nta

Präkṛta Exercise Book

Page #126

Exercise 22
(A-1) Write the inflected forms of a-ending Masculine Nouns in
the Instrumental Singular and Plural. 1. Narinda 2. Karaha
3. Divāyara 4. Mitta
5. Paramesara 6. Gantha 7. Rakkhasa 8. Mārua
9. Pada
Example a-ending Masculine Noun Narinda
Instrumental Singular Narindeņa/ Narindenam
Instrumental Plural Narindehi/ Narindehim/ Narindehis
(A-2) Write the inflected forms of a-ending Neuter Nouns in the
Instrumental Singular and Plural.
1. Kamala 4. Khetta 7. Lakkuda
2. Rajja 5. Vattha. 8. Jivana
3. Postala 6. Kamma 9. Dhana
Example a-ending Neuter Noun Kamala
Instrumental Singular Kamalena/ Kamalena
Instrumental Plural Kamalehi/ Kamalehim/ Kamalehin
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 22, study lesson 45 of
“Prákệta Grammar and Composition". Prāksta Exercise Book
103

Page #127

(A-3) Write the inflected forms of k-ending Feminine Nouns in
the Instrumental Singular and Plural. 1. Sasa 2. Māyå
3. Jara 4. Kaha
5. Kaņņā 6. Jhumpada 7. Mahila 8. Gangă
9. Sikkha
Example - å-ending Feminine Noun Sasa
Instrumental Singular Saske/Sasải/ Sasāa
Instrumental Plural Sasāhi/Sasāhim/ Sasāhis
(A-4) Write the inflected forms of Personal Pronoun in the
Instrumental Singular and Plural.
1. Amha 3. Ta
2. Tumha 4. Ta
Example Personal Pronoun Amha
Instrumental Singular Mai/Mael Me/Mamae
Instrumental Plural Amhehi/ Amhāhi
(B) Change the following Verbs into Past Participles. Write their
Nominative Neuter Singular forms.
1. Hasa 4. Pada
7. Khela 10. Saya
2. Lajja 5. Ghuma
8. Kulla 11. Biha
3. Thakka 6. Ucchala
9. Jujjha 12. Pasara
Example -
Verb Hasa
Past Particile Hasia/Hasiya Hasita/Hasida
Neuter Nominative Singular Hasiam/Hasiyam/ Hasitam/Hasidar
104
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #128

(C) Translate the following sentences into Pråksta. For making
sentences use Insturmental Singular or Plural in accordance with the Number (Singular or Plural) of Nouns and Personal Pronouns. Use the Past Participle of the Neuter Gender in the Nominative Singular for expressing the purport of the Past Tense.
1. The king laughed. 2. The dog barked. 3. The citizen woke up. 4. The grandson danced. 5. The girl danced. 6. The friend rejoiced. 7. The demon died. 8. The examination occurred. 9. The daughter coughed. 10. The ocean dried up. 11. The aircraft flied. 12. The small bundle fell down. 13. The lion roared. 14. The mother rejoiced. 15. The wife feared. 16. The camel sat. 17. The son slept. 18. The cloth dried up. 19. He tired. 20. You delayed. 21. 1 sat. 22. Kings laughed. 23. Friends rejoiced. 24. Demons died. 25. Daughters coughed. 26. Lions roared. 27. Mothers rejoiced. 28. Camels sat. 29. Sons sat. 30. Dogs barked. 31. Citizens woke up. 32. Girls danced. 33. Oceans dried up. 34. Wells dried up. 35. Jewels shine. 36. States fought. 37. Women calmed down. 38. Aircrafts flied. 39. Girls hid. 40. Citizens grieved. 41. Maternal uncles rejoiced. 42. Kings appeared. 43. Children played. 44. You all feared. 45. They tired. 46. We sat. 47. You all dealyed. 48. They (women) slept. 49. We went round.
Eaxmples
1. The King laughed =
Narindeņa/Narindeņam
Hasiam/Hasiyam/ Hasitam/Hasidam.
8. The examination occurred :
Parikkhảa/Parikkhai/ Parikkhảe
Hoam/Hoyam/ Hotam/Hodam.
20. You delayed -
Tai/Tael Tume/Tumae
Cirkvias/Cirâviyam/ Cirävitam/Cirāvidar
Praksta Exercise Book
105

Page #129

28. Camels sat :
Karahehi/Karahehim/ Karahehin
Citthias/Citthiyam/ Citthtiaí/Ciţthidaṁ.
40. Citizens grieved :
Nayarajaņehi/Nayarajaņehim/ Nayarajaņehis
Khijjiar/Khijjiyam/ Khijjitam/Khijjidań.
48. They (Fem.) slept =
Tāhi/Tahim/Tahis/ Tihi/Tihim/Tihis
Sayiaí/Sayiyaṁ/ Sayitam/Sayidarn.
(D) Translate the following sentences into Praksta. For expressing
the purport of the Past Tense use the Past Participle in Active Voice and Impersonal form. Write all the alternatives. Active Voice
Impersonal form 1. The friend rejoiced. This form does not exist in English. 2. The king laughed. 3. Demons jumped. 4. The daughter coughed. 5. Grandsons jumped. 6. Mothers rejoiced. 7. The dog barked. 8. The wife feared.
9. The son slept. 10. Citizens woke up. 11. The camel sat. 12. Water dripped. 13. Disgrace spread. 14. Fire burned. 15. Reputation increased. 16. Pleasure vanished. 17. The aircraft flied.
106
Pråksta Exercise Book

Page #130

18. The small bundel fell down.
19. The cloth dried up.
20. The book shined. 21. Girls danced.
22. Clouds thundered.
23. Oceans dried up.
24. Jewels shined.
25. The Woman calmed down.
Eaxmples ⚫
1. Active Voice -
The friend rejoiced =
Impersonal Form - The friend rejoiced
4. Active Voice
The daughter coughed=
Impersonal Form The daughter coughed =
10. Active VoiceCitizens woke up
=
Pråkrta Exercise Book

=
Mitto
Mittena/
Mittenam
Dhuä
Dhúȧa/
Dhuai/
Dhüäe
Harisio/Harisiyo/ Harisito/Harisido.
Harisiam/Harisiyam/ Harisitam/Harisidaṁ.
Khäsiä/Khāsiyā/ Khāsita/Khāsidā.
Khāsiam/
Khāsiyam/
Khāsitam/Khāsidaṁ.
Nayarajaṇāim/ Jaggiāiṁ/Jaggiāiṁ/ Nayarajaṇāim/ Jaggiani/Jaggitāim/ Nayarajaṇāṇi Jaggitäim/Jaggitāni/

Jaggidăim/
Jaggidȧim/
Jaggidāni.
107

Page #131

Impersonal Form -
Citizens woke up = Nayarajanehi/
Nayarajanehim/ Nayarajanehim
12. Active Voice
Water dripped =
Impersonal Form Water dripped=
41. Active Voice -
Girls danced =
108
Impersonal Form - Girls danced =

Udagam
Udagena/ Udagenam
Kanna/Kannau
Kannão
Kannahi/Kanṇāhim/
Kannähim

Jaggiam/Jaggiyam/ Jaggitam/Jaggidam.
Nijjhariam/
Nijjhariyam/
Nijjharitam/
Nijjharidam.
Nijjhariam/
Nijjhariyam/
Nijjharitam/
Nijjharidaṁ.
Naccia/Nacciau/
Naccião/Naccită/
Naccitau/Naccitão/
Naccida/Naccidău/
Naccidão.
Nacciam/Nacciyam/
Naccitam/
Naccidam.
Präkrta Exercise Book

Page #132

Exercise 23 (A) Translate the following sentences into Pråksta. Write all the
alternatives of Noun Forms, Pronoun Forms, Verbal Forms and Participle Forms. 1. The king laughs. 2. The king should laugh. 3. The king will laugh. 4. The King laughed. 5. The king laughed (Impersonal form). 6. Children sit. 7. Children sat. 8. Children will sit. 9. Children sat. 10. Children sat (Impersonal form). 11. The aircraft flies. 12. The aircraft should fly. 13. The aircraft will fly. 14. The aircraft flied. 15. The aircraft flied (Impersonal form). 16. Citizens appear. 17. Citizens should appear.18. Citizens will appear. 19. Citizens appeared. 20. Citizens appeared (Impersonal form). 21. The mother rejoices. 22. The mother should rejoice. 23. The mother will rejoice. 24. The mother rejoiced. 25. The mother rejoiced (Impersonal form). 26. Girls hide. 27. Girls should hide. 28. Girls will hide. 29. Girls hid. 30. Girls hid (Impersonal form). 31. He wakes up. 32. He should wake up. 33. He will wake up. 34. He woke up. 35. He woke up (Impersonal form). 36. You all stop. 37. You all should stop. 38. You all will stop. 39. You all stopped. 40. You all stopped (Impersonal form). 41. I stay. 42. I should stay, 43. I shall stay. 44. I stayed. 45. I stayed (Impersonal form). 46. They all wake up. 47. They all should wake up. 48. They all will wake up. 49. They all woke up. 50. They all woke up (Impersonal form). 51. Sītā gets up to sleep. 52. Sītā should get up to sleep. 53. Sītā will get up to sleep. 54. Sītā got up to sleep. 55. Sītā got up to sleep (Impersonal form). 56. You get up to dance. 57. You should get up to dance. 58. You will get up to dance. 59. You got up to dance. 60. You got up to dance (Impersonal form).
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 23, study lessons 1 to 45 of "Prākṣta Grammar and Composition".
Praksta Exercise Book
109

Page #133

Eaxmples - 1. The King laughs - Narindo Hasai/Hasei/Hasael
Hasadi/Hasade. 2. The king should - Narindo Hasau/Haseu/ laugh
Hasadu/Hasedu. 3. The king will Narindo Hasihii/Hasihie/Hasihidi/ laugh
Hasihide/Hasissai/ Hasissae/Hasissadi/ Hasissade/Hasissidi/
Hasisside. 4. The King - Narindo (i) Hasia (ii) Hasio/Hasiyo! laughed
Hasito/Hasido. 5. The king laughed = Narindeņa/ Hasiaṁ/Hasitas/
(Impersonal form) Narindeņaṁ Hasiyam/Hasidaṁ. 41. I stay
= Aham/Haṁ/ Thảmi.
Ammi 42.I should stay = Aham/Haṁ) Thămu.
Ammi 43. I shall stay Aham/Haṁ/ Tháhimi/Thāssāmi/
Ammi
Thâssimi/Thāhāmi/
Thassam. 44. I (Fem.) stayed - Aham/Ham/ (i) Thási/Thāhi/Thāhia
Ammi (ii) Tháā/Thāyā/Thādā/
Thātā. 45. I stayed
Mai/Mael Thaam/Thảyam/ (Impersonal form) Me/Mamae Thātam/Thādam.
(B) Point out the Original word, Person, Number, Case and Gender
in each of the following Noun forms and Personal Pronoun forms. Write the Suffixes of Noun forms. 1. Narindo
2. Pottehiṁ 3. Narehim 4. Vimäņam 5. Rajjāim 6. Veraggam
110
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #134

7. Kamalāu 10. Gangão 13. Divāyară 16. Nayarajaņāņi 19. Kammăim 22. Teņa 25. Ham 28. Tume
8. Tanaye 11. Karaho 14. Kūva 17. Chikkāņi 20. Nāņeņa 23. Tấu 26. Tumhehim 29. Tähim
9. Sasāhim 12. Ganthenam 15. Rahunandaņehim 18. Bhoyaņehiń 21. So 24. Amhe 27. Ta 30. Vayam
lau
Number Case
Gender Suffix
Example
Original Person
Word Narindo Narinda Third
Person
Singular Nominative Mas.
(C) In the following Participles point out Original Verb, suffix, and
the name of the Participle. Wherever posible write Case, Number, and Gender of the Participle.
1. Hasio
2. Naccanta 4. Rūsiä
5. Lukkanto 7. Sayiā
8. Lajjiảií 10. Acchantā 11. Padantau 13. Ghumantau 14. Ullasiāu 16. Jalanto 19. Bukkamänåim 20. Kandanta 22. Sohiūna 23. Pasaredum 25. Tuttaya 26. ViaseuTM 28. Phuredūņa 29. Nacceuṁ
3. Jivio 6. Jaggamano
9. Daramāņaim 12. Vtthantão 15. Nijjharia 18. Pasaramână 21. Jalium 24. Kanditta 27. Hasidum 30. Jaggiduń
Example
Original Suffix Verb
Case
Number
Gender Name
of the
Participle Mas. Past
Participle
Hasio
Hasa
Nominative Singular
111
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #135

(A-1) Change the following Verbs into the Impersonal form. Add the suffixes of the Third Person Singular Number to them in all the Tenses. (Present, Imperative, Past and Future)
1. Hasa
3. Lukka
5. Harisa
Example.
Impersonal
form
Hasa (i) Hasijja
(ii) Hasia
Exercise 24
112
Present

Hasijjai/
Hasiai/
Hasijjae/
Hasiae/
2. Nacca
4. Gala
6. Ullasa
Imperative
Hasijjau/ Hasiau/ Hasiaia
Hasijjadi/Hasiadi/ Hasijjade/Hasiade
Past
Hasijjaia/
Hasijjadu (Hasijjia)
Hasiadu
(Hasiia)
(B) Translate the following sentences into Prākṛta. For making sentences use Nouns and the Personal Pronouns in the Instrumental Singular or Plural. For expressing the different Tenses add the suffixes of the Impersonal form to the Verbs and thereafter add the suffixes of the Third Person Singular Number concerning a particular Tense.
Impersonal form (This form does not exist in English)
1. The king laughs. 2. The lotus blooms. 3. The sister wakes up. 4. I dance. 5. You jump. 6. He gets up. 7. She rejoices. 8. Kings rejoice. 9. Lotuses bloom. 10. Sisters wake up. 11. We dance.
Future
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 24, study lesson 47 of "Prākṛta Grammar and Composition".
Hasihii/
Hasihie/
Hasihidi/
Hasihide

Präkrta Exercise Book

Page #136

12. You all jump. 13. He get up. 14. They (Fem.) rejoice. 15. The son should play. 16. The citizen should appear. 17. The mother should sit. 18. You endeavoured. 19. I should sleep. 20. He should jump. 21. She should hide. 22. Sons played. 23. The citizen should appear. 24. Mothers should sit. 25. We should sleep. 26. You both should endeavour. 27. They jumped. 28. They (Fem.) should jump. 29. The Dog should bark. 30. The aircraft will fly. 31. The girl will play. 32. He should leap. 33. She will grieve. 34. You will delay. 35. I shall rejoice. 36. Dogs will bark. 37. Aircrafts will fly. 38. Girls will hide. 39. They will leap. 40. We all will play. 41. They (Fem.) will grieve. 42. You all will delay.
Examples Impersonal form : (This form does not exist in English)
1. The king laughs :
Narindena/ Narindenam
(i)
Hasijjai/Hsijjae/ Hasijjadi/Hasijjade. Hasiai/Hasiae/Hasiadi/Hasiade.
11. We dance :
Amhehi/Amhahi
Naccijjai/Naccijjae/ Naccijjadi/Naccijjade. Nacciai/Nacciae/ Nacciadi/Nacciade.
(ii)
18. You endeavoured :
Tai/Tae/ Tume/Tumae (ii)
Ujjamijjaia (Ujjamijjia) Ujjamiaia (Ujjamiia).
22.Sons played :
Puttehi/Puttehim) Puttehis
(i) (ii)
Khelijjaia (Khelijjia) Kheliaia (Kheliia) Kheliaiya (Khelsīya).
Prakrta Exercise Book
113

Page #137

28. They (Fem.) should jump :
Tāhi/Tahir/ (i) Kullijjau/Kullijjadu. Tāhiṁ
(ii) Kulliau/Kulliadu.
37. Aircrafts will fly :
Vimaņehi/Vimanehim) Vimāņehin
Uddihii/Uddihiel Uddihidi/Uddihide.
(C) In the following Nouns, Personal Pronouns and Verbs in
brackets are given. Make sentences of Impersonal form in accordance with the Tenses as directed and use Nouns or Personal Pronouns in Singular and Plural Number.
1. Narinda (Hasa) Pre. 3. Mitta (Harisa) Imp. 5. Mahila (Accha) Imp. 7. Kamala (Viasa) Pre.
9. Rajja (Ujjama) Imp. 11. Siya (Hasa) Pre. 13. Māyā (Harisa) Imp. 15. Amha (Kulla) Past. 17. Tumha (Harisa) Imp. 19. Ta (Uvavisa) Fut.
2. Kukkura (Bukka) Pre. 4. Siha (Gajja) Imp. 6. Divāyara (Uga) Past. 8. Sila (Phura) Imp. 10. Vimāņa (Udda) Past. 12. Sasă (Jagga) Pre. 14. Mahila (Uvasama) Imp. 16. Amha (Khela) Pre. 18. Tumhe (Ujjama) Imp. 20. Tá (Nacca) Imp.
Example - 1. The king : Narindeņa)
laughs Narindenam
(i)
Hasijjai/Hasijjael Hasijjadi/Hasijjade. Hasiai/Hasiael Hasiadi/Hasiade.
114
Praksta Exercise Book

Page #138

(D) Pick out the Original Verb, Person, Number, Suffix and the
Tense in each of the following Impersonal forms.
1. Hasijjai 3. Khayihii 5. Hasijjau 7. Kullijjae 9. Ruvijjae
2. Galijjai 4. Kīlijjai 6. Vasihie 8. Acchijjau 10. Lottihii
Example Impersonal Original Person Form
Verb
Number Suffix
Tense
Hasijjai
Hasa
Third Person
Singular
ijja
Present
Prakrta Exercise Book
115

Page #139

Exercise 2 5
(A)
Make the obligatory and Potential Participles by adding the suffixes to the following Verbs. Write their inflected forms in Nominative Singular Neuter Gender.
1. Hasa 3. Kalaha 5. Ghuma 7. Uvasama 9. Kudda
2. Lajja 4. Accha 6. Uttha
8. Thambha 10. Jāgara
Example
Obligatory and Verb Potential Participle
Obligatory and Potential Participle -(Inflected form) Nominative Singular Neuter Gender
Hasa
Hasiavva/Hasitavva/ Hasiavvaṁ/Hasitavvas/ Hasidavva/Haseavva/ Hasidavvar/Haseavvar/ Hasetavva/Hasedavva/ Hasetavvam/Hasedavvar/ Hasaniya
Hasaniyaṁ
(B) Translate the following sentences into Prakrta. For making
these sentences use Instrumental Singular or Plural Nouns and Personal Pronouns and for expressing the purport of the Imperative use the inflected forms of the Obligatory and Potential Participle in Nominative Singular Neuter Gender. Impersonal form : (This form does not exist in English) 1. The king should laugh. 2. The friend should rejoice. 3. The son should sleep. 4. Kings should laugh. 5. Friends should endeavour.
6. Sons should sleep. 7. The kingdom should fight. 8. The aircraft Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 25, study lesson 49 of “Prákệta Grammar and Composition".
116
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #140

should fly. 9. Kingdoms should fight. 10. The mother should rejoice. 11. Aircrafts should fly. 12. The girl should hide. 13. Mothers should rejoice. 14. Girls should hide. 15. He should play. 16. You should laugh. 17. I should endeavour. 18. She should dance. 19. We should endeavour. 20. They all should rejoice. Examples :Impersonal form : (This form does not exist in English)
1. The king : Narindeņa/
should laugh Narindeņam
9. Kingdoms - Rajjehi/Rajjehim/
should fight Rajjehis
Hasiavvar/Hasitavvam/ Hasidavvam/Hasaniyam/ etc. Jujjhiavvas/Jujjhitavvaṁ/ Jujjhidavvam/ Jujjheavvar/ Jujjhetavvaṁ/Jujjhedavvam/ Jujjhaniyam.
(C) In the following Nouns, Personal Pronouns and Verbs in
brackets are given. Form sentences by adding the Inflected forms of Obligatory and Potential Participle to the Verbs. 1. Narinda (Hasa) 2. Kamala (Viasa) 3. Saså (Khela)
4. Amha (Jagga) 5. Potta (Kulla) -6. Vimāņa (Udda) 7. Maya (Harisa) 8. Tumha (Ujjama) 9. Tá (Nacca)
10. Rajja (Jujjha)
Example
1. Narindeņa/
Narindenam
Hasiavvam/Hasitavvam/ Hasidavvaṁ/Hasaņiyam/ etc.
Praksta Exercise Book
117

Page #141

(D) Point out the Original Verb, Number, Case and Suffix in each
of the following Obligatory and Potential Participles.
1. Hasiavvaṁ
4. Daraṇīyaṁ
7. Padedavvam
10. Ucchaliavvaṁ
13. Mariavvaṁ
16. Jujjhedavvaṁ
19. Rūsiavvaṁ
Example -
Obligatory and Original
Potential
Verb
Participles
Hasiavvaṁ
118

Hasa
2. Lajjitavvaṁ 3. Ruvidavvam 5. Thakkeavvaṁ 6. Accheavvam
8. Utthaniyam 9. Ghumiavvaṁ 11. Ujjamitavvam 12. Kampidavvam 14. Kheleavvam 15. Kulletavvam
17. Sayaniyam 18. Naccitavvam
20. Lukkidavvaṁ
Number Case
Singular
Nominative

Suffix
avva
Präkrta Exercise Book

Page #142

Exercise 26
(A) Translate the following sentences into Prākṣta. Write all the
alternatives of the suffixes of Noun forms, Verb forms, and Participle forms. For constructing the Impersonal form of the imperative, use both the imperative Verbal form and the obligatory and Potential Participle.
Impersonal form The Impersonal form does not exist in English.
Active Voice 1. Children play. 2. The child played. 3. Children should play. 4. Children will play. 5. The mother rejoices. 6. The mother rejoiced. 7. The mother should rejoice. 8. The mother will rejoice.
9. I sleep. 10. I slept 11. I should sleep. 12. I shall sleep.
Example -
Active Voice Children play: Balaa
Khelanti/Khelante/Khelire.
Impersonal Form Children play : (Ordinary Impersonal) Balaehi/
Khelijjai/ Balaehim/
Khelijjael Balaehiń
Khelijjadi/
Khelijjade. Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 26, study lessons 42 to 49 of "Prākşta Grammar and Composition".
Prakrta Exercise Book
119

Page #143

11. Active Voice
I should sleep =
Aham/Haṁ! Ammi
Sayamu/Sayāmu/ Sayimu/Sayemu.
Impersonal Form I should sleep =
Mai/Mae/ Me/Mamae
(Ordinary Impersonal) Sayijjau/Sayijjadu/ Sayiau/Sayiadu.
(Obligatory and etc.) Sayiavvaṁ/Sayiyavvaṁ/ Sayitavvaṁ/Sayidavvam/ Sayaniyam/Sayeavvaṁ/ Sayeyavvam/Sayetavvaṁ/ Sayedavvaṁ.
(B) In the following Nouns, Personal Pronouns and Verbs in
brackets are given. Make sentences both in the Active Voice and the Impersonal form according to the Tenses as directed by using Nouns or Personal Pronouns in Singular or Plural Number.
1. Vimāņa (Udda) Pre. 3. Rajja (Jujjha) Fu. 5. Tá (Nacca) Past. 7. Māyā (Harisa) Imp. 9. Ta (Ņhá) Past.
2. Kaņņā (Lukka) Past. 4. Kukkura (Bukka) Pre. 6. Saddha (Vaddha) Imp 8. Tumha (Thakka) Pre. 10. Suya (Khela) Imp.
Example:(Active Voice) 1. Vimāņa
Uờdai/Uụdae/Uddadi/Uddade.
(Impersonal form) 2. Vimāņeņa/
Vimănenam
Uddijjai/Uddijjadi/ Uddiai/Uddiadi/etc.
120
Praksta Exercise Book

Page #144

(C) The following sentences are given in the Active Voice. Turn them from the Active Voice to the impersonal form.
1. Măulo
2. Mittä
3. Nará
4. Lakkuḍäim/Lakkuḍāni
5. Vatthaim/Vatthaim/
Vatthāni
6. Aham
7. Tum
8. So
9. Ham
10. Tā
Example :
1. Impersonal
Form
1. Kukkureṇa/ Kukkurenam
2. Pottehi/Pottehim/
Pottehim
3. Narehi/Narehim/ Narehim
Mäulena/
Mäulenam
Präkrta Exercise Book

Utthau/Uttheu/ Utthadu/Utthedu.
Harisantu/Harisentu.
Ujjamihinti/Ujjamissanti/etc.
Jalanti/Jalante/Jalire.
Sukkhiȧim/Sukkhiȧim/
Sukkhiāņi.
(D) The following sentences are given in the Impersonal form. Turn them from the Impersonal form to the Active Voice.
Thami.
Lukkasi/Lukkase/
Lukkesi.
Nhải/Nhadi.
Naccamu/Naccemu.
Naccia/Nacciau/Ṇaccião.
Utthijjau/Utthijjadu Utthiau/Utthiadu.
Bukkijjai/Bukkijjae/ Bukkiyai/Bukkiyae.
Sayijjai/Sayijjae/ Sayiyai/Sayiyae.
Ujjamihii/Ujjamihidi.

121

Page #145

4. Mittehi/Mittehim/
Mittehim
5. Lakkuḍehi/Lakkuḍehim/ Jaliam.
Lakkuḍehim
6. Mai
7. Tai/Tae
8. Tae/Tai
9. Tena/Tenam
10. Mai
Example
122
1. Active Voice
Harisiam.

Kullijjai/Kullijjae/ Kulliyai/Kulliyae.
Utthijjai/Uṭṭhijjae/ Utthiyai/Uṭthiyae.
Naccijjau/Nacciyau.
Uvasamijjau/Uvasamiyau.
Lukkiam.
Kukkuro
Bukkai/Bukkei/Bukkae/ Bukkadi/Bukkade.

Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #146

Exercise 27
(A-1) Change the following a-ending Masculine Nouns into the
Accusative Singular and Plural. 1. Narinda. 2. Kukkura 3. Māula 4. Nara 5. Vaya
6. Meha 7. Rakkhasa 8. Salila
9. Divāyara 10. Sīha 11. Karaha
9. Jañera
Example
Accusative Singular Narinda
Accusative Plural Narindā/Narinde
Narinda
(A-2) Change the following a-ending Neuter Nouns into the
Accusative Singular and Plural. 1. Bhoyaņa 2. Vimāņa 3. Kamma 4. Nāņa 5. Sutta
6. Vattha 7. Khetta 8. Suha
9. Nayarajana 10. Rajja 11. Dhana 12. Mana
Example
Accusative Singular Bhoyanar
Accusative Plural Bhoyaņāim/Bhoyaņāiṁ/ Bhoyaņāņi
Bhoyaņa
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 27, study lessons 51-52 of “Pråkst. Grammar and Composition”.
Prakrta Exercise Book
123

Page #147

(A-3) Change the following å-ending Feminine Nouns into the Accusative Singular and Plural.
Example .
Måyå
1. Mäyä
2. Kamalā
4. Kahā
5. Sariá
7. Kannā
8. Pasaṁsā
10. Nanandā 11. Mahilā
Amha
Example -
124
Accusative
Singular Māyaṁ
(A-4) Change the following Personal Pronouns into the Accusative Singular and Plural.
1. Amha
4. Ta (Neuter)

3. Nammayā
6. Guhā
9. Nisǎ
12. Sikkhȧ
Accusative
Plural
Accusative
Singular Mamam/Me/Mam
Māyā/Māyāu/Māyāo
2. Tumha
5. Tā (Feminine)
3. Ta (Masculine)
(B) Translate the following sentences into Prakṛta. Write all the alternatives of Inflected Nouns, Personal Pronouns and Verbs.
Accusative
Plural
Amhe/Amha
1. The king salutes God. 2. The camel grazes grass. 3. The son salutes the mother. 4. You bring me up. 5. The father should protect the son. 6. The king should know the states. 7. The daughter should understand education. 8. You protect me. 9. The grandfather will nurture the grandson. 10. The Citizen will hear the song. 11. The mother will protect the daughter. 12. She brings him up. 13. Rāma salutes Gods. 14. The government nurtures states. 15. Sisters hear stories. 16. She protects us. 17. The king should observe vows. 18. The son should understand pleasures. 19. The daughter should
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #148

understand education. 20. You should protect them. 21. She knows you. 22. Sita will observe vows. 23. They will protect human beings. 24. Camels will graze rice. 25. The Daughter will salute them. 26. The grandson will salute them. 27. They nurture us. 28. Hanumāna salutes Rāma. 29. Hanumana protects Sitā. 30. The mother should protect daughters. 31. Rāma understands Hanumāna. 32. The father-in-law eats (differents kinds of) food. 33. The grandfather understands religious books. 34. Citizens should protect jewels. 35. The friend will listen to the story. 36. Grandfathers will nurture grandsons. 37. The king knows citizens. 38. The state protects the king. 39. Sītā will listen to the story. 40. I salute you. 41. The king should salute the mother. 42. Gods should protect us. 43. The daughter will eat food. 44. Sitä knows Hanumāna. 45. Clouds nurture human beings. 46. You should know sufferings. 47.1 should salute them. 48. They know us. 49. The demon eats children. 50. You should protect them. Examples -
me
Tuha
1. The king - Narindo Paramesaraṁ Panamai/Panamei/ salutes God
Panamae/Panamadi/
Panamade. 8. You protect : Tumaṁ/ Mamaṁ/ Rakkhasi/
Tum/ Mam/
Rakkhasel Me
Rakkhesi. 26. The grandson will salute them - Potto Tel Tā (Mas.) Paņamihii/Paņamihie/Paņamihidi/ Tā/Tāu/Tão
Panamihide/Panamissai/ (Femi.)
Paņamissae/Paņamissadi/ Paņamissade/Paņamissidi/ Panamisside/Panamehii/ Panamehie/Panamehidi/ Panamehide/Paņamessai/ Paņamessae/Paņamessadi/ Panamessade.
Praksta Exercise Book
125

Page #149

32. The father-in-law eats (differents kinds of) food - Sasuro Bhoyanaim/Bhoyanāiñ/ Khăi/Khadi.
Bhoyaņāņi
42. Gods should = Paramesară Amhe/Amha/ protect us
Ne
Rakkhantu/ Rakkhentu.
(C) In the following Nouns, Personal Pronouns and Transitive
Verbs in brackets are given. In the middle Nouns or Personal Pronouns are given. Make sentences by converting them into the Accusative Singular or Plural and use the Tenses as directed. Write all the alternatives of Inflected Nouns, Personal Pronouns and Verbs. 1. Karaha, Tiña (Cara) Pre. 2. Sīya, Haņuvanta (Jāņa) Pre. 3. Amha, Ta (Panama) Imp. 4. Nayarajana, Rayana (Rakkha) Imp. 5. Potta, Ta (Panama) Fu. 6. Mitta, Kahā (Suņa) Fu. 7. Sasura, Bhoyaņa (Kha) Pre. 8. Ta, Amha (Jāņa) Pre.
9. Tumha, Dukkha (Jāņa) Imp. 10. Suyā, Sikkhā (Suņa) Imp. 11. Māyā, Vaya (Pala) Fu. 12. Tanayā, Bhoyaņa (Kha) Fu. 13. Ta, Nara (Rakkha) Fu. 14. Tā, Ta (Pala) Imp. 15. Amha, Tumha (Paņam) Imp. 16. Narinda, Paramesara (Panama) Imp.
126
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #150

17. Tumha, Amha (Jaņa) Fu. 18. Balaa, Gāņa (Suņa) Fu. 19. Putta, Māyā (Panama) Pre. 20. Māula, Putta (Rakkha) Imp.
Eaxmple.
1. Karaho
Tinaṁ Carai/Carae/Caradi/Carade.
(D) In the following Nouns and Personal Pronouns with Case
endings are given. Point out the Original word, Gender, Number and Case in each of the following. Write the suffixes of inflected Nouns.
1. Māyā
2. Narindo
4. Amhe
5. Tae
3. Bhoyaņāiń 6. Vimāņāim 9. Mamam 12. Icchão
8. Karaha
11. Māulo
7. Sasău 10. Sokkham 13. Tão 16. Rajjar 19. Ta
14. Taim
15. Potte
17. Kamala
18. Tam
20. Ham
V
AL
Example
Number Case
Suffix
Original Gender Word
Maya
Māyā
Feminine Singular
Nominative 0
Prakrta Exercise Book
127

Page #151

(A) Translate the following sentences into Prākṛta. Write all the alternatives of Inflected Nouns, Personal Pronouns and Verbs.
Exercise 28
128
1. I worship God. 2. Moral conduct withholds disgrace. 3. You should taste milk. 4. The wife will wash cloths. 5. Girls uncover the small pitcher of water. 6. Hanumāna helps Rāma. 7. You should eat food. 8. Dogs uproot rice. 9. Human beings should renounce addictions. 10. Sisters will grind rice. 11. Desire withholds sleep. 12. Gambling stigmatises the human being. 13. He should pick seeds. 14. The husband's brother will see lions. 15. We thresh rice. 16. The grandfather calls grandsons. 17. You should call them. 18. They will cut the small bundle. 19. They both dig the field. 20. Women will observe vows. 21. Sisters should see daughters. 22. We shall worship the Ganges. 23. You both peel the wood. 24. They should renounce wine. 25. Daughters will wash cloths. 26. The husband's sisters partake of food. 27. Demons cheat children. 28. The child sees the lotus flower. 29. The Demon will cheat children. 30. Clarified butter oils food. 31. I eat clarified butter. 32. The sister should renounce sleep. 33. The father-inlaw blames the wife. 34. The king discovers jewels. 35. You should see clouds. 36. The daughter will break the thread. 37. The citizen cheats the child. 38. The maternal uncle touches books. 39. Praise touches the mind. 40. He should discover pleasure. 41. Children see the aircraft. 42. You should eat clarified butter. 43. Suffering withholds pleasure. 44. You should touch water. 45. I shall saw the forest. 46. You should partake of food. 47. Hunger withholds thirst. 48. We both should dig the pit. 49. The mother touches the son. 50. Wisdom uncovers knowledge. 51. He will tear the cloths. 52. The king should renounce pride. 53. The demon will stop the
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 28, study lesson 53 of "Prakṛta Grammar and Composition".

Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #152

dog. 54. The son should saw grass. 55. The truth shall manifest moral conduct. 56. The son should renounce addiction. 57. You all should renounce wine. 58. He grinds seeds. 59. I call the
daughter. 60. The woman covers the pit. Examples :1. I worship God - Aham/
Accami/ Ham/ Paramesaram Accāmi/ Ammi
Accemi.
3. You should - Tumam/ Khiram taste milk Tur/
Tuha
Cakkhahi/Cakkhehi/ Cakkhasu/Cakkhesu/ Cakkhadhi/Cakkhedhi/ Cakkha/Cakkhejjasu/ Cakkhejjahi/Cakkhejje.
25. Daughters : Suya/
will wash Suyau/ cloths
Suyao/
Vatthāim/
Vatthāiñ/ Vatthani
Dhoihinti/Dhoihintel Dhoihiire/Dhoissanti/ Dhoissante/Dhoissaire/ Dhoissinti/Dhoissinte/ Dhoissiire.
30.Clarified butter- Ghayam Bhoyaņam
oils food
Coppadai/Coppadael Coppadadi/Coppadade/ Coppadedi.
42. You should = Tumaṁ/ Ghayam
eat clarified Tum/ butter Tuha
Kháhi/Khāsu/Khādhi/ Khãejjā/Kháejjäsi/ Khāejjāhi.
50. Wisdom
: Pannā
Nanam
uncovers knowledge
Ugghādai/Ugghādei/ Ugghādae/Ugghădadi/ Ugghádedi/Ugghadade.
Prākrta Exercise Book
129

Page #153

Exercise 29 (A-1) Change the following i-ending and i-ending Masculine
Nouns into the Nominative, the Accusative and the Instrumental Singular and Plural. 1. Sami
2. Muņi 3. Kesari
4. Giri 5. Risi
6. Gamani
Example
Singular Sami Nominative : Sami
Accusative : Samim Instrumental - Sāmiņā
Plural Sāmi/Sāmau/Samao/ Sámi/Samiño Sámihi/Sāmihim/Sāmīhim
(A-2) Change the following i-ending Neuter Nouns into the
Nominative, the Accusative and the Instrumental Singular and Plural. 1. Dahi
2. Acchi 3. Atthi
4. Vari 5. Sāli
6. Sappi
Example
Singular
Dahi Nominative =
Dahim
Accusative =
Dahim
Plural Dahiim/Dahiiñ/ Dahini Dahiim/Dahiiñ/ Dahini
Dahihi/Dahihim/ · Dahihiṁ
Instrumental - Dahiņā
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 29, study lessons 55 to 610f
“Praksta Grammar and Composition". 130
Präkrta Exercise Book

Page #154

(A-3) Change the following i-ending and i-ending Feminine Nouns into the Nominative, the Accusative and the Instrumental Singular and Plural.
1. Bhatti
2. Ratti
5. Sāmiņi
Example .
Singular
Bhatti Nominative =
Bhatti
Accusative =
Bhattim
Instrumental = Bhattia/
Bhattiä/
Bhattii/
Bhattie
1. Jantu
3. Maccu
5. Sayambhu
Example .
(A-4) Change the following u-ending and ù-ending Masculine Nouns into the Nominative, the Accusative and the Instrumental Singular and Plural.
Singular
Jantu Nominative = Jantū
Accusative = Jantum
Instrumental=
Jantuṇā
6. Mani
7. Paramesari
10. Nāri
Präkrta Exercise Book

Plural
Bhatti/Bhattiu/Bhattio
Bhatti/Bhattiu/Bhattio
Bhattihi/
Bhattihim/
Bhattihim
2. Bindu
4. Sattu
6. Khalapú
Plural
Jantu/Jantuno/Jantavo/
Jantao/Jantau
Jantu/Jantuno
Jantühi/Jantühim/Jantühim
(A-5) Change the following u-ending Neuter Nouns into the Nominative, the Accusative and the Instrumental Singular
and Plural.

131

Page #155

1. Mahu 3. Vatthu 5. Āu
2. Assu 4. Jāņu 6. Dāru
Example -
Singular Mahu Nominative : Mahum
Plural Mahūis/Mahūiń/ Mahuni Mahuim/Mahüiñ Mahūni Mahūhi/Mahuhim/Mahuhim
Accusative :
Mahum
Instrumental - Mahună
(A-6) Change the following u-ending and u-ending Feminine
Nouns into the Nominative, the Accusative and the Instrumental Singular and Plural. 1. Dhenu
2. Sassu 3. Haņu
4. Bahū 5. Sasů
6. Camú
Example
Singular Dhenü
Dheņu Nominative :
Accusative :
Dhenum
Plural Dheņu/Dheņuu/ Dhenuo Dhenú/Dheņuu/ Dhenuo Dhenühi/Dhenühim/ Dhenühiñ
Instrumental : Dhenua/
Dheņūă/ Dheņui/ Dhenue
132
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #156

Exercise 30
(A) Translate the following sentences into Prākṛta. Write all the alternatives of Inflected Nouns and Verbal forms.
1. The master rejoices. 2. Saints will sit. 3. The Secretary should endeavour. 4. The enemy fought. 5. The village headman sits. 6. Curd drips. 7. Eyes ached. 8. The bone will dry up. 9. Water should trickle. 10. Devotion should increase. 11. Satisfaction will occur. 12. Jewels fall. 13. Prosperity increased. 14. Daughters play. 15. Wealth should increase. 16. Women will endeavour. 17. The maternal aunt tired. 18. The sări dries up. 19. The sister danced. 20. The mother will tire. 21. The grandmother should sit. 22. Drops will fall. 23. Radiance should bloom. 24. The guru should rejoice. 25. The enemy fights. 26. The father laughed. 27. Honey drips. 28. Tears will drop down. 29. The knee tired. 30. Age should increase. 31. Things shine. 32. Cows run away. 33. Small spoon broke. 34. The mother-in-law should sit. 35. The daughter-in-law endeavours.
Examples :
2. Saints will sit =
Muni/Munau/ Munao/Munino
=
6. Curd drips: Dahim
Uvavisihinti/Uvavisihinte/Uvavisihiire/
Uvavisissanti/Uvavisissante/Uvavisissaire/
Uvavisissinti/Uvavisissinte/Uvavisissiire.

Cuai/Cuae/Cuadi/Cuade/Cuei/Cuedi.
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 30, study lessons 30 to 40 and 54 to 59 of "Prākṛta Grammar and Composition".
Präkrta Exercise Book

133

Page #157

7. Eyes ached =
Acchiim/Acchiim/ (i) Dukkhia/(ii) Dukkhiaim/
Dukkhiäim/Dukkhiāņi.
Acchini
13.Prosperity increased =
Riddhi
32. Cows run away =
-
Dheņuu/Dheņuo/ Palanti Palanti/Palante → Palante/
Palaire.
Dhenů
(i) Vaddhia (ii) Vaḍdhia/Vaḍdhiyā/ Vaddhita/Vadḍhidā.
(B) Translate the following sentences into Prākṛta. Write all the alternatives of Inflected Nouns and Verbal forms.
134
1. The master partakes of food. 2. The saint should drink water. 3. The poet will observe vows. 4. The village headman greets them. 5. Eyes see the human being. 6. I should eat curd. 7. The dog will eat bones. 8. Saints drink water. 9. Human beings should do devotion. 10. The earth will emanate jewel. 11. Mothers will wash Sāris. 12. Sisters should worship God. 13. The human being should renounce prosperity. 14. The maternal aunt congratulates the daughter. 15. The father blames the son. 16. The Sadhu should renounce pride. 17. God will protect you. 18. Raghu helps us. 19. The Cleaner of granery digs the pit. 20. Svayambhu salutes Rāma. 21. The son eats food. 22. The son should touch the knee. 23. You should withhold tears. 24. She will search things. 25. The cow breaks the tree of Jamuna. 26. The daughter-in-law will serve the mother-in-law. 27. The army will protect human beings. 28. The sister thieves the rope. 29. The son dirts the cloth. 30. The elephant will drink water.
Examples :
1. The master partakes of food =
Sämi
Bhoyaṇam

Jemai/Jemae/ Jemadi/Jemade.

Prákrta Exercise Book

Page #158

4. The village headman greets them =
Gāmani
Te/Tǎ/
Tāu/Tão
Oṇandai/Onandae/
13. The human being should renounce prosperity =
Naro
Riddhim
Onandadi/ Onandade/ Onandedi.
Pråkrta Exercise Book
22. The son should touch the knee =
Sūņū
Jāņum

Cuau/Cueu/
Cuadu/Cuedu.
28. The sister thieves the rope = Bahini Rajjum
Chuvau/Chuveu/ Chuvadu/Chuvedu.
Corāvai/Corāvae/ Corāvadi/Corāvedi/
Corăvade.

135

Page #159

(A) Translate the following sentences into Prākṛta.
1. The master calls me. 2. I am called by the master. 3. The saint sees us. 4. We are seen by the saint. 5. The enemy will kill you. 6. You will be killed by the enemy. 7. The king should salute the saint. 8. The saint should be saluted by the king. 9. The mortifier will narrate the story. 10. The story will be narrated by the mortifier. 11. The brother forgets me. 12. I am forgotten by the brother. 13. The commander should salute the master. 14. The master should be saluted by the commander. 15. Mother will thresh rice. 16. Rice will be threshed by the mother. 17. You call me. 18. I am called by you. 19. We shall remember you. 20. You will be remembered by us. 21. He should renounce prosperity. 22. Prosperity should be renounced by him. 23. Mothers nurture sons. 24. Sons are nurtured by mothers. 25. The serpent stings the child. 26. The child is stung by the serpent. 27. The sister serves the woman saint. 28. The woman saint is served by the sister. 29. He prays them. 30. They are prayed by him.
Exercise 31
Examples :
1. The master calls me =
Sămi
Mamam
=
2. I am called by the master Sāmiņā
Aham/Ham/
Ammi
136
Kokkai/Kokkei/Kokkae/ Kokkadi/Kokkade.

Kokkijjami/Kokkiami/
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 29, study lessons 53 and 54 of "Prakṛta Grammar and Composition".
Kokkiyami.

Präkrta Exercise Book

Page #160

9. The mortifier will narrate the story : Tavassi/
Kaham Vakkhāņihinti/Vakkhåņihinte/ Tavassau/
Vakkhånihiire./Vakkhánissanti/ Tavassaol
Vakkhánissante/Vakkhāņissaire/ Tavassiņo
Vakkhánissinti/Vakkhäņissinte/ Vakkhānissiire.
10. The story will be narrated by the mortifier = Tavassihi/
Vakkhānihii/Vakkhānihiel Tavassihim/ Kah, Vakkhánihidi/ Tavassihiń
Vakkhăņihide.
21. He should renounce prosperity :
Riddhiṁ Cuau/Cueu/Cuadu/Cuedu.
So
22. Prosperity should be renounce by him =
Tena/ Riddhi Cuijjau/Cuejjau/Cuijjadu/Cuejjadu/ Tenam
Cuiau/Cuiadu/Cuiyau/Cuiyadu.
(B) In the following Nouns and Personal Pronouns are given in
the beginning. For making use of them as subjects change them to the Nominative Singular or Plural. In the middle also Nouns and Personal Pronouns are given. Change them to the Accusative Singular or Plural. In the brackets the Transitive Verbs are given. Make Sentences in the Active Voice and the Passive Voice according to the Tenses as directed. Write all the alternatives of inflected Nouns, Personal Pronouns and Verbs.
1. Bhāi ....... Amha (Kokka) Pre. 2. Amha ....... Sáhu (Nama) Fu. 3. Kai ....... Gāņa (Gä) Imp. 4. Manti ....... Naravai (Nama) Fu. 5. Tumha ....... Ta (Thuņa) Imp.
Prakrta Exercise Book
137

Page #161

6. Ari ....... Amha (Haņa) Pre. 7. Amha ....... Tavassi (Sumara) Pre. 8. Jāmāu ....... Bhoyaņa (Khå) Fu.
9. Pahu ....... Amha (Peccha) Pre. Example :
(Actvie Voice) 1. Bhai Mama
Kokkai/Kokkei/Kokkae/Kokkadi/Kokkade.
(Passive Voice) 2. Bhāiņā Aham/Ham/ Kokkijjami/Kokkiami/
Ammi Kokkiyami
(C) In the following inflected Nouns are given. Point out the
Original word, Gender, Number, Case and suffix in each of the following.
3. Vāriim
.
1. Samina 4. Atthiņā
7. Lacchia 10. Pahū 13. Vatthūiñ 16. Sassuu 19. Vaunā
2. Kaihim 5. Bhattīu
8. Sattůhim 11. Sāhuna
6. Tatti 9. Bhattio
12. Mahūhim
14. Amsühi
15. Puttii
18. Camuhim
17. Taņue 20. Bahiņie.
Example
Original Gender Word
Number Case
Suffix
Sámiņā
Sámi
Masculine Singular Instrumental na
138
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #162

Exercise 32
(A-1) Translate the following sentences into Pråksta. For
expressing the purport of the Past Tense use the Past Participle. Write all the alternatives of Inflected Nouns, Personal Pronouns and Participles. 1. The commander was killed by the enemy. 2. Clothes were torn by the child. 3. Milk was drunk by brothers. 4. Karmas were bound by human beings. 5. Songs were sung by the poet. 6. The thread was cut by the master. 7. Education was held by the saint. 8. Wisdom was known by saints. 9. Food was eaten by the citizen. 10. Demons were killed by Rāma. 11. Wealth was desired by the daughter. 12. The story was told by the saint. 13. Aircrafts were seen by me. 14. Detachment was desired by him. 15. Addictions were described by you. 16. Water was drunk by us. 17. Compassion was produced by them. 18. The order was obeyed by him. 19. The saint was prayed by the teacher. 20. The hut was seen by the son-in-law.
Examples :
The Commander was killed by the enemy : Sattuna Senåvai
Mārio.
Songs were sung by the poet : Kaiņā
Gāņāim/Gånais/ Ganani
Găāim/Gāain/ Gāāni.
13.
Aircrafts were seen by me : Mai/Mae/ Vimāņāim/ Me/Mamae Vimāņāiñ/
Vimānani
Pecchiaim/ Pecchiais/ Pecchiani.
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 32 study lessons 57 to
62 of “Präkta Grammar and Composition". Prakrta Exercise Book
139

Page #163

20.
The hut was seen by the son-in-law : Jāmāuņā Jhumpadă Pecchia/Pecchida/
Pecchita.
(A-2) Translate the following sentences into Pråksta. For
expressing the purport of Imperative use the Obligatory and Potential Participle. Write all the alternatives of Inflected Nouns, Personal Pronouns and Participles.
1. The tree should be irrigated by the brother. 2. The saint should be called by Raghupati. 3. Songs should be sung by poets. 4. The lion should be killed by the elephant. 5. The sun should be saluted by the saint. 6. Curd should be eaten by me. 7. Water should be drunk by us. 8. Bones should be thrown by them. 9. Fields should be irrigated by you. 10. Age should be seen by him. 11. Prosperity should be obtained by you. 12. Satisfaction should be demanded by him. 13. Jewels should be carried by the earth. 14. Sadis should be bought by the maternal aunt. 15. Devotion should be done by the woman. 16. The rope should be braided by you. 17. The cow should be nurtured by him. 18. The tree of Jāmuna should be irrigated by us. 19. Daughter-in-laws should be forgiven by mother-inlaws. 20. Grass should be burnt by you.
Examples :The tree should be irrigated by the brother : Bhaiņå Taru Siñciavvo/Siñcitavvo/
Siñcidavvo/Siñcaniyo.
Curd should be eaten by me : Mai/ Dahim Asiavvaṁ/Asidavvam/ Khāavvar/ Mael
Asiyavvar/Asitavvam/ Khădavvam/ Me/ Aseavvaṁ/
Or Khātavva/ Mamae Aseyavvaṁ/Asedavvam/ Khāyavvaṁ.
Asetavvar/Asaniyam
140
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #164

16.
The rope should be braided by you : Tai/ Rajjū Gundhiavvā/Gundhiyavvā/Gundhidavvā/ Tae/
Gundhitavvā/Gundhaniyā/Gundheavvā/ Tumae
Gundhedavvā/Gundheyavvå/Gundhetavvå.
19.
Daughter-in-laws should be forgiven by mother-in-laws: Sassühi/ Bahü/ Khamiavva/Khamiavvău/ Sassühim/ Bahuu/
Khamiavvão/Khameavva/ Sassühin Bahủo Khameavvau/Khameavvão.
(B-1) In the following Nouns and Transitive Verbs in brackets
are given. Change the Nouns given in the middle into the Nominative Singular or Plural and make sentences in the Passive Voice representing the Past Tense. Write all the alternatives.
2. Simi, Bhayana (Khá)
1. Rahunandana, Rakkhasa (Hana) 3. Kai, Vaya (Pala)
4. Sasā, Tumha (Khama) 6. Bhai, Amha (Pukkara)
5. Mitta, Amha (Vaddhava)
7. Ta, Dhana (Magga)
· 8. Amha, Ta(Ņirakkha)
9. Tumha, Amha (Bandha)
10. Muņi, Tumha (Pesa)
1.
Example :Rahuộandaņeņa/ Rahuộandaņeņam
Rakkhaso
Hanio.
(B-2) In the following Nouns and Transitive Verbs in brackets
are given. Change the Nouns given in the middle into the Nominative Singular or Plural and make sentences in the Passive Voice representing the Imperative. Write all the alternatives.
1. Rahuvai, Sāhu (Kokka)
2. Ta, Lakkuda (Ranga) 4. Maheli, Paramesara (Thuņa)
3. Amha, Dukkha (Uppada)
Prakrta Exercise Book
141

Page #165

6. Tavassi, Amha (Sumara)
5. Jogi, Agama (Padha) 7. Tumha, Rajju (Gundha)
8. Ta, Amha (Khama)
9. Amha , Vāri (Piba)
10. Risi, Divāyara (Vanda)
Example :
1.
Rahuvaiņå
Sāhū
Kokkijjau/Kokkijjadu/ Kokkiau/Kokkiadu.
(C)
In the following inflected Nouns and Participles are given. Pick out the Original word, Gender, Number, Case and Suffix and tell also the name of the Participle. 1. Kokkio
2. Dekkhia 3. Suņiāu 4. Kiņiavvar 5. Rakkhitavvo 6. Labhidavvo
7. Jhāeavvă 8. Pibiavvă 9. Gaņeavvāim 10. Peccheavvā 11. Dhäriäim 12. Páliău 13. Pesião
14. Dhāreavvá 15. Bahữu 16. Maņetavvo 17. Cakkhiavvão 18. Dhenão 19. Sāmiņa
20. Muņihim 21. Gāmaņihin 22. Sáhuņa 23. Vimāņšim 24. Silena 25. Acchihim 26. Paviavvão 27. Putto 28. Bujjhiavva 29. Gaạidavvo 30. Guruhim
Example -
Original Gender Word
Number
Case
Suffix Name of
the Participle
Kokkio Kokka
Masculine
Singular
Nominative
a
Past
142
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #166

Exercise 33
(A) Translate the following sentences into Präkṛta. Write any one alternative of Inflected Nouns, Participles and Verbs.
1. Saluting Raghupati, the master gets up. 2. Serving the village headman, he will tire. 3. Tasting honey, they both sleep. 4. Bringing up the daughter, the mother will rejoice. 5. Singing the song, the daughter should dance. 6. Irrigating the field, the father will tire. 7. Praying God, you should salute him. 8. Beating the son, the mother grieves. 9. Sending the son, she weeps. 10. We should all get up for praying God. 11. You will endeavour for getting satisfaction. 12. The lion kills the child for eating. 13. The father enthuses to congratulate the daughter. 14. They should endeavour to tie the rope. 15. The woman gets up to see the cow. 16. She will go to purchase the thing. 17. The commander runs to kill the enemy. 18. The grandfather goes to congratulate the grandson. 19. You should get up to listen to the story. 20. I endeavour to chew food. 21. Having saluted Raghupati, the master rejoices. 22. Having greeted the teacher, the poet sits. 23. Having done devotion, you should live. 24. Having obtained satisfaction, you will rejoice. 25. Having seen the cows, they get up. 26. Having saluted God, saints meditate. 27. Having thieved the jewel, the brother runs away. 28. Having remembered God, the king should sleep. 29. Having oppressed the child, the demon jumps. 30. Having broken the rope into pieces, the son throws it.
Examples:
1. Saluting Raghupati, the master gets up =
Sămi
Rahuvaim
Namanto
Utthai.
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 33 study lesson 64 of "Prākṛta Grammar and Composition".
Pråkrta Exercise Book

143

Page #167

10. We should all get up for praying God :
Amhe Paramesarassa Bhattin Karium
Utthamo.
24. Having obtained satisfaction, you will rejoice :
Tumaṁ Tattim Labhiūņa Ullasihisi.
144
Praksta Exercise Book

Page #168

Exercise 34
(A) Translate the following sentences into Prāksta. Write all the
alternatives of the Dative and Genitive Cases used in the following sentences. 1. My son desires pleasure. 2. The son of the king will salute Râma. 3. The pleasure of the son becomes the pleasure of the father. 4. Your mother should listen to the story. 5. My daughter will desire pleasure. 6. The brother of the master will salute God. 7. You should drink the water of the Narmadā. 8. My teacher meditates God. 9. The enemies of kings think to fight. 10. My maternal aunts purchase Sāris. 11. Their daughters rejoice. 12. My Husband's sister describes him. 13. He remembers the song of the poet. 14. The sister of the maternal uncle should listen to the story. 15. My friend should demand the small bundle for him. 16. The enemy of the brother will kill the son. 17. His eyes ache. 18. The son of the maternal aunt should purchase book for the sister. 19. The son of the king serves the mortifier. 20. The daughter of the brother should pray God. 21. The sister of the Commander will send honey for the maternal uncle. 22. The daughter of maternal uncle worships God to get prosperity. 23. Your son should endeavour for spiritual attainment. 24. You should purchase food for the saint. 25. The grandmother obtains things for the grandison. 26. His sister should hide. 27. The daughter of the husband's sisters will sleep. 28. The son of the maternal aunt will help him. 29. Your son should forgive my son. 30. Your brothers will count the saints. 31. God should protect your son. 32. The tree of Jāmuna increases. 33. He digs the pit for the elephant. 34. The mother-in-law protects her daughter in law. 35. He partakes of food for satisfaction. 36. You should obtain the cloths for human beings. 37. The son of
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 34 study lessons 66 to 69 of “Präkệta Grammar and Composition".
Prákrta Exercise Book
145

Page #169

the minister should salute the king. 38. The pleasure of Rāma is my pleasure. 39. The mother of Sītā will listen to the story. 40. The Government of the state will protect him. 41. The brothers of the masters salute him. 42. The teachers of poets see us. 43. His teacher partakes of food. 44. He reads his book for the examination. 45. My son will laugh for pleasure. 46. The son of the king should demand the small bundle for Rama. 47. He drinks the water of the Narmada for the body. 48. His mother will bring you up. 49. I shall listen to the story of the Ganges. 50. His son
should go to the house. Examples :
1. My son desires pleasure :
Mamam/Maham/Majjha Putto
Sokkhar
Icchadi etc.
6. The brother of the master will salute God :
Samino! Bandhū Paramesaraṁ Vandihii/Vandihie/ Samissa
Vandihidi/Vandihide/ Vandissai/Vandissael Vandissadi/Vandissade/ Vandissii/Vandehii/ Vandehie/Vandessai/ Vandessae.
17.His eyes ache :
Tāsa/ Acchiim/ Tassa Acchiis/
Acchiņi
Dukkhanti/ Dukkhante/ Dukkhire.
31. God should protect your son =
Pahu Tujjha Puttam
Rakkhau/Rakkheu/ Rakkhadu/Rakkhedu.
50. His son should go to the house :
Tāsa/ Putto Gharam Gacchau/Gaccheu/ Tassa
Gacchadu/Gacchedu.
146
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #170

Exercise 35
(A) Translate the following sentences into Prákệta. Write all the
alternatives of the Ablative Case used in the following sentences.
(1) The child is afraid of the serpent (2) Food grows from the field. (3) He is afraid of the cow. (4) The Jāmuna falls from the tree of Jamuna. (5) Having feared, the son will run away from the lion. 6. The child falls from the mountain. 7. The Ganges comes down from the mountain. 8. He should be afraid of me. 9. He will read the book from you. 10. The tree grows from the seed. 11. The son hides from the father. 1 2. We are afraid of fathers. 13. They hide from women. 14. They are afraid of the master. 15. You should learn through the saint. 16. You should be afraid of the king. 17. Children are afraid of the elephant. 18. The minister is afraid of the king. 19. Water drips from the small water pitcher. 20. The maternal uncle will be afraid of the serpent.
Examples :1. The child is afraid of the serpent : Bālao Sappatto/Sappão/Sappaul
Sappähi/Sappähinto/Sappa
Darai.
4. The Jamuna falls from the tree of Jamuna -
Jambúa/Jambúa/Jambūi/Jambúel Jambů Jambutto/Jambüo/Jambúu/Jambūhinto
Padanti.
7. The Ganges comes down from the mountain =
Girino/Giritto/Giriol Gangă Nisarai/Nisarae/ Giriu/Girihinto
Nisaradi/Nisarade.
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 35 study lessons 71 to 77 of “Präkşta Grammar and Composition".
Praksta Exercise Book
147

Page #171

13. They hide from women : Te
Juvaitto/Juvaio/Juvaiu/ Juvaihinto/Juvaisunto
Lukkanti.
(B) Translate the following sentences into Prákyta. Write all the
alternatives of the Locative Case used in the following sentences.
1. Clouds thunder in the sky. 2. The water will dry up in the Naramdā. 3. Sītā listens to the story in the house. 4. He sits on the small bundle. 5. The speech will tire in the old age. 6. The wealth increases in the kingdom of Rāma. 7. His mother brings up the daughter in the house. 8. Having laughed, you danced in the house. 9. She faints in the examination. 10. You should tie the cow in the field. 11. Daughters will see the moon in the sky. 12. They throw things in the field. 13. You jumped in the ocean for bathing. 14. Thd dog digs the pit in the forest. 15. The serpent moves on the tree. 16. The father prays God in the house. 17. The maternal uncle salutes the (goddess of) wealth in the evening. 18. He bathes in the Yamunā. 19. Having burned, the things will disappear in the hut. 20. His mind engages in the house.
Examples :1. Clouds thunder in the sky :
Nahe/Nahammi Mehā Gajjanti. 6. The wealth increases in the kingdom of Rama :
Rahunandanassa Rajje/Rajjammi Lacchi
Vaddhai.
10. You should tie the cow in the field :
Tumas/Tuṁ/Tuha Dheņuí Khette/Khettami Bandhahi.
19. Having burned, the things will disappear in the hut : Vatthūim/
Jhumpadãa/ Vatthüiñ/
Jhumpadāi/ Jaliūņa Nassihinti. Vatthuni
Jhumpadãe
148
Praksta Exercise Book

Page #172

(C) Translate the following sentences into Prākṣta. Write all the
alternatives of the Vocative Case used in the following sentences.
(1) Oh master ! you should protect us. (2) Oh king ! there exists pleasure in your kingdom. (3) Oh friend ! you should come to my house. (4) Oh mother ! you should bring up children. (5) Oh sità ! suffering exists in the forest. (6) Oh son ! you should speak the truth. (7) Oh young woman ! you should laugh. (8) Children ! you all should read the book. (9) Friends ! you all should be afraid of the state. (10) Saints ! you should observe self-control.
Examples :1. Oh master! you should protect us : Såmi/Sami Tumhe Amhe/
Amha
Rakkhaha.
10. Saints ! you should observe self-control :
Sähau/Sāhao/Sähavo/ Sarjamam Palaha/ Sáhuņo/Sāhū
Paradha.
149
Pråksta Exercise Book

Page #173

Exercise 36
(A) Translate the following sentences into Praksta. Make
sentences by changing the Verbs into Causative forms.
1. He causes the aircraft to fly in the sky. 2. The king should make the government spread in the state. 3. He causes the grass to grow. 4. The commander will cause the army to hide. 5. You should cause detachment to increase in old age. 6. The saint causes men to calm down. 7. The mother causes the daughter to stop for dancing. 8. She causes me to laugh. 9. I cause him to wake up. 10. You cause him to hide. 11. They cause them to dance. 12. Citizens cause rice to grow in the field. 13. The demon causes the child to die. 14. The maternal aunt causes the daughter to jump in the ocean. 15. The grandmother causes the grandson to bathe. 16. The maternal uncle causes the daughter to stay. 17. The father should cause the daughter to sleep. 18. Demons cause children to fear. 19. The grandmother makes children eat. 20. The king makes the saint sit.
Examples :
1. He causes the aircraft to fly in the sky : So Ņahel Vimāņam Oddai/Oddei/ Nahammi
Oddāvai/Oddávei.
5. You should cause detachment to increase in old age : Tumam/ Jarka/
Vaddhasu/Vaddhesu/ Tum/ Jarai/ Veraggam Vaddhāvasu/Vaddhávesu/ Tuha Jarãe
Vaddhahi/Vaddhehi/ Vaddhavahi/Vaddhāvehi/ Vaddhejjasu/Vaddhejjahi.
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 36 study lesson 78 of “Prákyta Grammar and Composition".
150
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #174

15.The grandmother causes the grandson to bathe : Piāmahi Pottas
Nhắai/Nhặei/ Nhávai/Ņhávei.
(B) Translate the following sentences into Pråksta. Make
sentences by adding the causative suffixes of tha Passive Voice. 1. The aircraft is caused to fly by him in the sky. 2. The government is caused to spread by the king in the state. 3. Grass is made to grow by him. 4. The army is caused to hide by the commander. 5. Detachment should be caused to increase by you in old age. 6. The man is caused to calm down by the saint. 7. The daughter is made to stop by the mother for dancing. 8. I am made to laugh by him. 9. He is caused to wake up by me. 10. He is made to hide by you. 11. They are caused to dance by them. 12. Rice is caused to grow in the field by the citizen. 13. The child is made to die by the demon.14. The daughter is caused to stay by the maternal uncle. 15. The grandson is made to bathe by the grandfather. 16. The son is caused to partake of food by the father. 17. Children are made to fear by demons. 18. The child is made to partake of food by the grandfather. 19. The king is caused to sit by the saint. 20. He is caused to sink in the ocean by the enemy.
Examples :
1. The aircraft is caused to fly by him in the sky =
Tena Nahe Vimānam Uddāvijjai/Uddáviai.
7. The daughter is made to stop by the mother for dancing =
Māyaal Putti Ņaccavium) Rokkāvijjai/ Magãi/
Naccaviduṁ Rokkāviai. Mayae
Prāksta Exercise Book
151

Page #175

(C) Translate the following sentences into Pråkṛta. Write any one alternative of the inflected Nouns, Personal Pronouns, Verbs and Participles.
1. He was made to laugh by me. 2. I was made to hide by you. 3. The son was caused to laugh by the father. 4. The daughter was caused to dance by the maternal aunt. 5. Things were made to purchase by us. 6. Causing him to laugh, he plays. 7. Causing the enemy to run away, you tire. 8. Causing me to fear, the son hides. 9. Causing him to weep, the child runs away. 10. Causing the mother to stay, the maternal uncle rejoices. 11. He should be made to laugh by you. 12. Education should be made to spread by the teacher. 13. The body should be mortified by the sister. 14. He should be caused to meditate by the ascetic. 15. The thing should be caused to hide by him. 16. Having caused him to laugh, you live. 17. Having caused the daughter to dance, the mother rejoices. 18. Having caused men to meditate, the saint sits. 19. Having caused him to wake up, she runs away. 20. Having caused him to partake of food, they rejoice. 21. He causes him to wake up for making him laugh. 22. He tells him for making him run away. 23. The ascetic sits for causing him to meditate. 24. The mother gets up for making daughter dance. 25. The grandmother endeavours for causing grandson to sleep.
Examples :
1. He was made to laugh by me = So
Mai
Hâsio.
8. Causing me to fear, the son hides = Darȧvanto
Putto
Lukkai.
12.Education should be made to spread by the teacher =
Guruṇā Sikkha
Pasarāviavvȧ.
152

Präkrta Exercise Book

Page #176

Exercise 37
(A) Translate the following sentences into Präkệta by adding the
Retainer of Innate meaning suffixes (Svårthika Suffixes) to the Nouns.
1. The lotus blooms. 2. The human being rejoices. 3. The ascetic calls me. 4. The son will honour the father. 5. The commander should conquer the enemy. 6. The child tastes honey. 7. The soul enlightens the mind. 8. The king reproaches the minister. 9. The mother congratulates the son. 10. The father remembers the son. 11. The elephant will eat grass. 12. Men pray the teacher 13. Teachers salute God. 14. The son-in-law should partake of food. 15. The tree falls. 16. The bow shines. 17. The jewel breaks. 18. The house glitters. 19. The maternal aunt should sit. 20. The
sister should get up. Examples :
1. The lotus blooms :
Kamalaarn/Kamalillam/Kamalullam
Viasai.
7. The soul enlightens the mind =
Appao/Appaillo/Appaullo Cittam
Joai.
13.Teachers salute God :
Gurua/Guruilla/ Paramesaraṁ Gurúllä
Vandanti/Vandantel Vandire
20.The sister should get up :
Sasāa/Sasäillä/ Sasaulla
Utthau/Uttheu/ Utthadu/Usthedu.
Note :
In order to solve the above exercise 37 study lessons 79 to 81 of “Präkta Grammar and Composition".
Pråksta Exercise Book
153

Page #177

(B) Translate the following sentences into Pråksta. Make
sentences by using different Pronouns. 1. That man laughs. 2. These men laugh. 3. He reads this book. 4. They read these books. 5. I live for it. 6. She lives for these. 7. I observe this vow. 8. What do you do? 9. The man who tires, sleeps. 10. He who sleeps, laughs. 11. Whose body tires, his old age increases. 12. Whom I call, you are that. 13. The wood on which you sit, is mine. 14. Whose son is he? 15. Which work do you perform? 16. Who dances? 17. By what does he drink water? 18. For whom do you live? 19. Which kingdom do you protect? 20. In which house does he live?
Examples :
1. That man laughs =
Naro
So
Hasai.
3. He reads this book :
So Etam Gantham
Padhai/Padhae/Padhadi/Padhade.
12. Whom I call, you are that:
Aham/Harn/Ammi Jam Kokkami So Tumar/Tum/Tuha Atthi.
20. In which house does he live? :
Kammi Gharammi So Vasai.
(C) Translate the following sentences into Pråksta. Make
sentences by using Indeclinables.
1. As long as you read, (for that time) I shall nurture you. 2. As long as you wake up, (for that time) I see the sky. 3. Where your village is, there is my house. 4. Wherever you will go, there you will rejoice. 5. The way in which he desires pleasure likewise I desire pleasure. 6. The way in which you play likewise I shall play. 7. Where does the minister live? 8. Where do they sleep? 9. I sleep here. 10. Today
154
Pråkrta Exercise Book

Page #178

the saint will come here. 11. Do not jump. 12. The child does not get up. 13. The mother does not tire. 14. If you say then I go to the village. 15. If you will say, then I shall eat food. 16. The way in which you play by engaging mind, in the same way you also read. 17. The way in which the mother brings up the son, in the same way the king nurtures the state. 18. The way in which you sing, likewise you also dance. 19. Do not sit in this way. 20. You should not drink wine. 21. The enemy fought, so he died. 22. So long as he speaks the truth, (for that time) he rejoices. 23. You should not go home without the son. 24. You should dance, he will also dance.
Examples:
1. As long as you read, (for that time) I shall nurture you = Jāva Tumam Padhihisi Tāva Aham Tumaṁ Pälihimi.
7. Where does the minister live? = Kahim
Manti
14.If you say then I go to the village = Jai Tumam Bhanasi Tā Aham
Vasai/Vasae/Vasadi/Vasade/Vasedi?
21. The enemy fought, so he died = Sattu Jujjhio/Jujjhia Tam
Prakrta Exercise Book

Gāmaṁ
Mario/Maria.

Gacchami.
155

Page #179

Exercise 38 Verbal forms of Irregular Passive Voice :
The Verbal form which is formed by adding ijja or ia/iya suffix to the Transitive Verbs in Prāksta is known as the Regular Verbal form of the Passive Voice. As, kara + ijja = karijja, kara + iya/ia : kariya/ karia, are the Regular Verbal forms of the Passive Voice, since they are formed by adding ijja or ia/iya to the verb Kara. By adding the suffixes of Tense, Person and Number to the above constructed Verbal forms, the regular Passive Voice of that Tense, Person and Number will result, as, Karijjai or Kariyai/Kariai - Present Tense Third Person Singular Number.
On the contrary, the Verbal form which is obtained without adding ijja or iya/ia to the Transitive Verbs and in which the suffixes of Tense, Person and Number are inherently present, is known as the Irregular Verbal form of the Passive Voice, as, 1. Kirai, Disai etc. - Verbal forms of the Irregular Passive Voice
(Present Tense Third Person Singular Number)
In these the Original form of the Verb cannot be separated. They are required to be known from the existing uses in literature. The following Verbal forms of the Irregular Passive Vocie are compiled.
Present Tense Third Person Singular Number 1. Aðhappai - Is begun.
8. Dajjhai - Is burnt. 2. Kirai = ls done, is observed. 9. Ņajjai : Is known. 3. Khammai - Is dug.
10. Ņavvai = Is known. 4. Gammai - Is gone.
11. Thuvvai - Is prayed. 5. Gheppai - Is adpoted. 12. Dubbhai : Is milked. 6. Chippai : Is touched. 13. Disai : Is seen. 7. Jivvai - Is conquered. 14. Bajjhai - Is tied.
Note :1. See lesson 54 of “Praksta Grammar and Composition”.
156
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #180

15. Bhaņņai - Is told.
16. Bhujjai
= ls experienced.
17. Rubbhai = ls withheld. 18. Ruvvai = Is wept. 19. Labbhai = is obtained. 20. Luvvai • Is cut. 21. Libbhai = Is licked.
23. Vilimpai - Is smeared. 24. Viðhappai: Is earned. 25. Sisai = ls said. 26. Sampajjai = ls obtained. 27. Suvvai - Is heared. 28. Sippai - Is irrigated. 29. Hammai - Is killed. 30. Hirai • Is kidnapped.
22. Vuccai
= ls told.
(A) Translate the following sentences of the Passive Vocie into
Pråksta. In the translation use the Irregular Verbal forms of the Passive Voice.
1. The prayer is begun by me. 2. The vow is observed by that woman. 3. The pit is dug by brothers. 4. The song is heard by the girls. 5. Education is adopted by us through the teacher. 6. The water of the ocean is touched by the child. 7. The village is conquered by the king. 8. My house is burnt by them. 9. Suffering of the world is known by the ascetics. 10. The Agama is known by the saints. 11. The desire of the son is known by the mother. 12. The saint is prayed by women. 13. The cow is milked by him. 14. The splendour of the state is seen by the king. 15. The cow is tied by me with the rope. 16. The rule of the vow is told by the woman saint. 17. Prosperity is experienced by the kings. 18. Running away, the son is withheld by the mother. 19. Knowledge is obtained by the maternal uncle. 20. Honey is licked by the child. 21. The cloth is cut by the woman. 22. Wealth is obtained by you. 23. The story is told by the saint. 24. The hut is smeared by the woman. 25. Wealth is earned by the son. 26. Suffering of the world is told by the saint. 27. The jewel is obtained by the mistress. 28. Praise is done by your daughter. 29. The tree is irrigated by the daughter. 30. The enemy is killed by the commander. 31. The son of the king is kidnapped by the minister.
Práksta Exercise Book
157

Page #181

Examples :
1. The Prayer is begun by me :
Mai/Mae/Me/Mamae Thui Adhappai.
6. The water of the ocean is touched by the child :
Balaena Sayarassa Jalaṁ Chippai.
13. The cow is milked by him :
Teņa Dheņu Dubbhai.
19. Knowledge is obtained by the maternal uncle :
Māuleņa Ņāņam Labbhai.
29. The tree is irrigated by the daughter :
Puttia Taru Sippai.
158
Prâkyta Exercise Book

Page #182

Exercise 39
Irregular Past Participle:
For expresing the Past Tense in Prākṛta, the suffixes of the Past Tense and the Past Participle are used. For the Past Participle a/ya, ta, da suffixes are added to the Verbs1 as,
Hasa+a/y, ta, da = Hasia/Hasiya/Hasita/Hasida Laughed Thaa/ya, ta, da = Thaa/Thaya, Thāta, Thada = Stayed Jha+a/ya, ta, da = Jhaa/Jhāya/Jhata, Jhāda = Maditated etc. In this way the Past Participles which are formed by adding a/ya, ta, da to the Verbs are known as the Regular Past Participles. In these, the original form of the Verb can be understood by separating the suffixes from them. In the Masculine Gender the inflection of these will be according to Deva, in the Neuter Gender the inflection will be according to Kamala and In the Feminine Gender the inflection will be according to Kahȧ.
On the contrary, the Past Participles which are obtained without adding a/ya, ta, da suffixes to the Verbs are known as the Irregular Past Participles. In these, the original form of the Verb can not be understood by separating the suffixes from them, as,
Vutta
= is/are told,
Dittha
= is/are seen,
Dinna
= is/are given etc.
All these are the Irregular Past Participles. From these the Verbs can not be separated. The inflection of these will be according to Deva in the Masculine Gender, will be according to Kamal in the Neuter Gender, and will be according to Kaha in the Feminine Gender.
The Past Participles (regular or irregular) constructed from the
Note :
1. See lessons 42 and 57 of "Prākṛta Grammar and Composition".
Pråkrta Exercise Book

159

Page #183

Transitive Verbs are used only in the Passive Voice. Only those Past Participles which are constructed from the Verbs denoting movement are used both in the Passive Voice and the Active Voice. The Past Participles (regular or irregular) constructed from the Intransitive Verbs are used in the Active Voice and in the Impersonal form. The Irregular Past Participles are required to be known from the existing uses in literature. Here a few Irregular Past Participles without any suffix are compiled. 1. Irregular Past Participles constructed from the Transitive
Verbs. Past Meaning in Use Participle Passive Vocie
Was/Were 1. Diţtha seen
In the Three Genders and Two Numbers. 2. Sampuņņa --completed, In the Three Genders and Two Numbers.
fulfilled 3. Khaddha eaten,
In the Three Genders and Two Numbers.
consumed 4. Diņņa given
In the Three Genders and Two Numbers. 5. Ņihiya kept
In the Three Genders and Two Numbers. 6. Pavanna obtained In the Three Genders and Two Numbers. 7. Chuddha thrown, In the Three Genders and Two Numbers.
placed, put 8. Daddha burned, In the Three Genders and Two Numbers.
set on fire 9. Vutta told,
In the Three Genders and Two Numbers. described,
narrated 10. Dummiya distressed In the Three Genders and Two Numbers. 11. Kia
done
In the Three Genders and Two Numbers. 12. Lua
cut
In the Three Genders and Two Numbers. 13. Haya
killed
In the Three Genders and Two Numbers. 14. Ņiya taken away
In the Three Genders and Two Numbers. in the
160
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #184

2. Irregular Past Participles constructed from the Verbs
indicating mobility.
Past
Meaning
Participle in the Active Voice
1. Gaya/Gaa Went
2. Patta
Past
Participle
1. Mua
2. Thia
4. Nattha
5. Sutta
Reached

3. Irregular Past Participles constructed from the Intransitive
Verbs.
Stayed
Use
In the Three
Genders and
Two Numbers
Meaning Use
in the
Active
Voice
Died
Präkṛta Exercise Book
In the Three
Genders and
Two Numbers
3. Santuṭṭha Rejoiced In the Three
Genders and
Two Numbers
Slept
In the Three
Genders and
Two Numbers
In the Three Genders and
Two Numbers
Disappered In the Three
Genders and Two Numbers
Meaning
in the Passive
Voice
Gone
In the Three Genders and Two Numbers
Reached
Meaning
in the
Impersonal
Form
Died
Stayed
Rejoiced
Disappered
Slept
Use

In the Three
Genders and
Two Numbers
In the Three
Genders and
Two Numbers
Use
In the Neuter
Singular Number
In the Neuter
Singular Number
In the Neuter
Singular Number
In the Neuter
Singular Number
In the Neuter
Singular
Number
161

Page #185

6. Baddha Tied
7. Bhiya
(1)
162
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Feared

In the Three
Genders and
Two Numbers
In the Three
Genders and Two Numbers
Write all the alternatives of the Irregular Past Participles constructed from the Transitive Verbs.
Use in the Passive Voice
Kia = Was/Were done
(1)
Tied
Mäulena/
Mäulenam
Feared
Pride was done by the maternal uncle.
Gavvo
Kio.
Vows were observed by the sister.
Sasǎa/Sasǎi/
Vaya
Sasae
Narindena/
Narindeṇam
Kiä.
The government was ruled by the king.
Sāsanaṁ
Kiam.
Kammāim/
Kammāim/
Kammāni
In the Neuter
Singular
Number
In the Neuter
Singular
Number
Different actions were done by the master.
Sāmiņā
Kiǎim/
Kiaim/
Kiāņi.
Examination was held by the teacher.
Guruņā
Parikkha
Kiä.

Präkrta Exercise Book

Page #186

(6)
(2-A) Write all the alternatives of the Irregular Past Participles constructed from Verbs indicating mobility.
Use in the Active Voice
Gaya/Gaa = Went
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Desires were done by the young lady.
Juvaia/
Icchǎ/
Kia/
Juvaii/
Icchâu/
Kiȧu/
Juvaie
Icchǎo
Kião.

The Son went to the house.
Putto Gharam
Gayo.
Grandsons went to the house.
Pottä Gharam
The Aircraft went to the forest.
Vaṇam Gayaṁ.
Vimāṇaṁ
Gayā.
Citizens went to the house.
Nayarajaṇāim/
Nayarajaṇāim/ Gharam
Nayarajaṇāņi
The girl went to the house.
Kanna Gharam
Präkrta Exercise Book
Daughters went to the house.
Suya/Suyǎu/
Gharam
Suyão

Gayāim/
Gayāim /
Gayāņi.
Gayā.
Gaya/Gayāu/ Gayão.
163

Page #187

(2-B) In the literature the use of Passive Voice of Verbs
indicating mobility is found in very small number. So here only one example is being given. Use in the Passive Voice (This dose not exist in English)
(1)
The son went to the house.
Putteņa/Putteņam
Gharo Gayo.
(3-A) Write all the Irregular Past Participles constructed from
the Intransitive Verbs. Use in the Active Voice
Mua - Died (1) The enemy died.
Sattu Muo.
Enemies died.
Sattu/Sattau/Sattao/Sattavo/Sattuno Mua.
The citizen died. Nayarajaņam
Muaṁ.
Citizens died. Nayarajaņāim/Nayarajaņāiñ/ Muaim/Muáin/ Nayarajanani
Muáņi.
The daughter died. Suya
Mua.
Sisters died. Sasa/Sasau/Sasão
Mua/Muau/Muảo.
164
Pråksta Exercise Book

Page #188

(3-B) Use in the Impersonal Form. (This form dose not exist in English)
Mua = Died
(1)
(2) Enemies died.
(3)
(4)
(5)
The enemy died.
Sattuṇā
Sattühi/Sattühim/
Sattühim
Präkrta Exercise Book

The citizen died.
Nayarajanena/ Nayarajanenaṁ
Citizens died.
Nayarajanehi/ Nayarajanehim/ Nayarajanehim
(6) Daughters died.
The daughter died.
Suyaa/Suyai/Suyãe
Suyahi/Suyahim/ Suyāhim
Muam.
Muam.
Muam.
Muam.
Muam.
(A) Tranaslate the following sentences into Prākṛta. For making sentences write all the alternatives of Irregular Past Particlples consturcted from the Transitive Verbs.
Muam.
1. The elephant was given by the king for the commander. 2. Religious books were given by the saint for the father. 3. Wealth

165

Page #189

was given by the mother for the daughter. 4. Clothes were given by the mother for the daughter. 5. The jewel was given by the king for the commander. 6. Cows were given by the master for the brother. 7. The book was kept in the house by the maternal uncle. 8. Religious books were kept in the house by Hari. 9. Wealth was kept in the pitcher by the grandfather. 10. Small bundles were kept in the field by the grandmother. 11. The Sādi was kept on the tree by the maternal aunt. 12. The pitcher was kept in the field by women. 13. Water was obtained by mortifiers. 14. Books were obtained by the maternal uncle. 15. Food was obtained by the young lady. 16. Lotuses were obtained by children. 17. Prosperity was obtained by the king. 18. The jewel was obtained by the sister. 19. The bow was put on the earth by the master. 20. The jewel was thrown in the ocean by the king. 21. Wealth was thrown in the well by the woman. 22. Sticks were thrown in the field by human beings. 23. The rope was put in the field by the maternal aunt. 24. Jewels were placed in the pitcher by the young lady. 25. The cloth was burned by the son. 26. Houses were burned by the minister. 27. The small bundle was burned by the maternal uncle. 28. Kingdoms were set on fire by the king. 29. The rope was burned by the daughter. 30. Huts were burned by enemies. 31. Suffering was told by the mother. 32. Religious books were described by the saint. 33. The truth was told by the maternal uncle. 34. Pleasurs were told by sisters. 35. Story was narrated by the mother. 36. Stories were narrated by the mother. 37. The minister was distressed by the king. 39. The citizen was distressed by the enemy. 40. Citizens were distressed by the minister. 41. The serpent was seen by the maternal uncle. 42. Serpents were seen by the maternal uncle. 43. The aircraft was seen by the child. 44. Aircrafts were seen by children. 45. The cave was seen by the mother. 46. Caves were seen by the mother. 47. Action was completed by the human being. 48. Actions were completed by human beings. 49. The desire of the daughter was fulfilled by the mother. 50. The desires of the daughter were fulfilled by the mother. 51. The cow was eaten by the lion. 52. Cows were eaten by the lion. 53. Jāmuna was eaten by the son.
166
Praksta Exercise Book

Page #190

54. Jāmunas were eaten by sons. 55. Curd was consumed by the daughter. 56. Bones were eaten by the dog. 57. The tree was sawed by the maternal uncle. 58. Trees were sawed by maternal uncles. 59. The paper was cut by the son. 60. Papers were cut by the son. 61. The knee of the enemy was cut by the commander. 62. The knees of the enemies were cut by the commander. 63. The elephant was killed by the king. 64. Elephants were killed by the king. 65. The citizen was killed by the commander. 66. Citizens were killed by the commander. 67. The sister of the king was killed by the enemy. 68. The sisters of the king were killed by the enemy. 69. The son was taken away by the minister. 70. Sons were taken away by the minister. 71. The citizen was taken away by the king. 72. Citizens were taken away by the king. 73. The daughter was taken away by the maternal aunt. 74. Daughters were taken away by the maternal aunt.
Examples:
1. The elephant was given by the king for the commander = Narindena Seṇāvaiņo Hatthi Dinno.
10. Small bundles were kept in the field by the grandmother = Piāmahiā Poṭṭalaim Khetammi Nihiyāim.
24.Jewels were placed in the pitcher by the young lady = Juvaia Kalasiyãe Manio Chuddhão.
53. Jamuna was eaten by the son = Putteṇa Jambu Khaddho.
66. Citizens were killed by the commander =
Seṇāvaiņā Nayarajaṇāim/
Nayarajaṇāim/ Nayarajaṇāni
(B) Transalate the following sentences into Prākṛta. For making sentences write all the alternatives of irregular Past Particlples consturcted form the Verbs indicating mobility.
Präkrta Exercise Book
Hayāim/
Hayaim/
Hayāni.

167

Page #191

1. The son went to the house. 2. Sons went to the house. 3. The son went (Impersonal form). 4. The mother reached the field. 5. Mothers reached the field. 6. The mother reached the field (Impersonal form).
Example :1. The son went to the house :
Putto Gharaṁ Gayo.
(C) Translate the following sentences into Práksta. Write all the
alternatives of Irregular Past Participles constructed form the Intransitive Verbs. 1. The son rejoiced. 2. Sons rejoiced. 3. The citizen rejoiced. 4. Citizens rejoiced. 5. The mother rejoiced. 6. Mothers rejoiced. 7. The village disappeared. 8. Villages disappread. 9. The aircraft disappeared. 10. Aircrafts disappeared. 11. The enemy died. 12. Enemies died. 13. The citizen died. 14. Citizens died. 15. The daughter died. 16. Daughters died. 17. The maternal uncle stayed. 18. Maternal uncles stayed. 19. The citizen stayed. 20. Citizens stayed. 21. The woman stayed. 22. Women stayed. 23. The camel slept. 24. Camels slept. 25. The citizen slept. 26. Citizens sletp. 27. The sister slept. 28. Sisters slept. 29. The grandson feared. 30. Grandsons feared. 31. The citizen feared. 32. Citizens feared. 33. The girl feared. 34. Girls feared.
Impersonal form: 35. The enemy died. 36. The daughter rejoiced. 37. Daugthers rejoiced. 38. Enemies died. 39. The maternal uncle stayed. 40. Women stayed. 41. Karmas disappeared. 4 2. Sisters slept.
43. Grandsons feared. 44. The girl feared. Examples :1. The son rejoiced : . Putto
Santuttho.
21. The woman stayed :
Jāyā
Thia.
40. Women stayed :
Jāyāhiń
Thiam.
168
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #192

Exercise 40 Abbreviations and method of Grammatical analysis with examples
Absolutive Adjective Adverbs Causative Verbs Feminine Gender Future Tense Impersonal Form Imperative Indeclinable Infinitive Intransitive Verbs Irregular Obligatory and Potential Participle
- Abs. = Adj. - Adv. - Cau. : Fem. - Fu. - Imp. F. • Imp. • Ind. • Inf. - Intr. - Irre. = OPP.
Passive Voice Past - Pass. PAT Tense Past Participle = PAP. Past Tense
= PAT. Present Tense - PT. Present Participle = PP. Pronoun
= Pro. Pronominal Adjective - Pro. Adj. Retainer of Innate - Rim. Meaning Suffixes (Svarthika Suffixes) Transitive Verb - Tr.
Indicative of Original Word *[0+() +()] + sign is indicative of joining together of
words. *(0-0)-()] • sign is indicative of compounding
of words. *[{ ( ) - ()-() } Adj.] The entire unit in this type of brackets is
indicative of Adjective.
* Where only number 1/1, 2/1 etc. are written
outside brackets the word inside the bracket is
indicative of noun. * Where Passive Voice, Participle etc. are not
according the rules of Prákrta Grammar, there irre. is also written outside the bracket.
Pråksta Exercise Book
169

Page #193

1/2
2/1
First Person/Singular Intra. or Tr. First Person/Plural Intra. or Tr. Second Person/Singular Intra, or Tr. Second Person/Plural Intra. or Tr. Third Person/Singular Intra. or Tr. Third Person/Plural Intra. or Tr.
2/2
3/1
3/2
1/1 1/2 2/1
2/1
3/1
Inst
3/2
4/1
4/2
Nominative Case/Singular Number Nominative Case/Plural Number Accusative Case/Singular Number Accusative Case/Plural Number Instrumental Case/Singular Number Instrumental Case/Plural Number Dative Case/Singular Number Dative Case/PluralNumber Ablative Case/Singular Number Ablative Case/Plural Number Genitive Case/Singular Number Genitive Case/Plural Number Locative Case/Singular Number Locative Case/Plural Number Vocative Case/Singular Number
5/1
5/2
6/1
6/2
7/1
7/2
8/1
8/2
Vocative Case/Plural Number
170
Pråkrta Exercise Book

Page #194

Method of Grammatical-analysis Noun
Narindassa Pronoun
Tena
(Narinda) 4/1 (Ta) 3/1 Pro.
Pronominal Adjective
Savvam
(Savva) 2/1 Pro. Adj.
Verb
Hohii
(Ho) Fu. 3/1 Intr.
Absolutive
Nisuņiúna
(Nisuņa+ūņa) Abs.
Infinitive
Present Participle
Past Participle
Hasittae (Hasa+ttae) Inf. Joyanto (Joya+nta) PP. 1/1 Mario (Māra - Mária) PAP. 1/1 Samaggalaṁ (Samaggala) 2/1 Adj. Naccijjai (Nacca+ijja) PT. Imp F.
3/1 Intra.
Adjective
Impersonal Form
Passive Voice
Vilassijjai
(Vilasa+ijja) PT. Pass. 3/1 Tr.
Causative
Darisāvami
(Darisa+ăva) Cau. PT. 1/1 Tr.
Jambio
(Jambūa) 1/1 a. Rim.
Retainer of Innate Meaning Suffixes (Svarthika Suffixes)
Indeclinable
Vinu
Ind.
Adverbs
Avasena
(Avasa) 3/1 Adv. (Mukka) PAP. 1/1 Irre.
Irregular Past Participle
Mukko
Irregular Passive Voice
Labbhai
(Labbhai) PT. Pass. 3/1 Tr. Irre.
Praksta Exercise Book
171

Page #195

Examples:
1. Suyano Na Kuppai Cciya Aha Kuppai Mangulam Na Cintei.
Suyano
(Suyaṇa) 1/1
Na
Ind.
(Kuppa) PT. 3/1 Tr.
Ind.
Ind.
Kuppai
Cciya
Aha
Mangulaṁ
172
Na
Cintei
2. Duraṭṭhiya Na Dure Sajjanacittāņa Puvvamiliyāņaṁ.
Důraṭṭhiya
Na
Dure
Sajjanacittāņa
Puvvamiliyāṇaṁ
Däliddam
Bhavvayam
(Mangula) 2/1
Ind.
(Cinta) PT. 3/1 Tr.
3. Silam Varam Kulão Daliddam Bhavvayaṁ Ca Rogão.
Silam
(Sila) 1/1
Varam
Ind.
Kulão
(Kula) 5/1
Ca
Rogão

[(Dūra) Ind. = Dūra-(Tithiya) PAP.1/2 Irre. ]
Ind.
Ind.
[(Sajjana)-(Citta) 4/21
[(Puvva) Adv. - (Mila) PAP. 4/21
(Dalidda) 1/1
(Bhavva) 1/1 Adj. Ya Rim.
Ind.
(Roga) 5/1

Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #196

Page #197

Exercise 41
(Prakṛta Story and its English Translation) [Kassesā Bhajjā]
1. Hatthiṇāure Nayare Suranāmā Rāyaputto Nāṇāgunarayana Samjutto Vasai. Tassa Bhāriyā Gangābhihāṇā Sīläiguṇālankiyā Paramasohaggasārā. Sumaināmā Tesim Dhūya. Sa Kammapariņāmavasao JaṇayaJanani-Bhāyā-Mäulehim Pudho-Pudho Varānam Diņņā.
2. Cauro Vi Te Vara Egammi Ceva Dine Parineum Āgayā Paropparam Kalaham Kuṇanti. Tao Tesim Visame Sangame Jayamāṇe Bahujaṇakkhayaṁ Datthūna Aggimmi Paviṭṭhā Sumaikanņā. Tie Samaṁ Nividanehena Ego Varo Vi Paviṭṭho. Ego Aṭṭhini Gangappavähe-Khivium Gao. Ego Ciarakkham Tattheva Jalapure Khiviūna Taddukkheṇa MohamahāgahaGahio Mahiyale Hindai. Cauttho Tattheva Thio Tam Thảṇaṁ Rakkhanto Paidiņam Egamannapiṇḍaṁ Muanto Kalam Gamei.
3. Aha Taio Naro Mahiyalam Bhamanto Katthavi Game Randhaṇagharammi Bhoaṇaṁ Karāviūṇa Jimium Uvavitṭho. Tassa Gharasāmiņi Parivesai. Taya Tie Lahuputto Aiva Roii. Tao Tie Rosaparavvasaṁ Gayãe So Bālo Jalaṇammi Khivio. So Varo Bhoyanam Kuṇanto Utthium Laggo. Sa Bhanai "Avaccarūvāņi Kassa Vi Na Appiyāņi Honti, Jesim Kae Piuno Aṇegadevayāpuyādāṇamantajavāiṁ Kim Kim Na Kuṇanti.
Prakrta Exercise Book
174

Page #198

1. In Hastinapura City, there lived a prince named Śūra, who was endowed with diverse Jewels of virtues. His wife named Ganga was adorned with moral virtues and (she) was the most fortunate (woman). Their daughter was named Sumati. Because of the domination of karmic fruitions, she was given to different (prospective) bridegrooms by the father, the mother, the brother and the maternal uncle.
Exercise 41 Whose Wife is this?
2. All those four bridegrooms reached (her) place at the same day and started quarrelling with one another. Seeing the destruction of many persons in the emerging unbalanced discord among them, the girl Sumati entered the fire and one bridegroom also entered (the fire) on account of the intense love for her. The other (second) went to cast the bones in the flow of the Ganges. Having cast the ashes of the pyre there in water, the other (third) wandered on the earth; having been seized by the great planets of attachment on account of the grief, the fourth stayed there and protecting that place and renouncing one morsel of food daily he passed time.
3. Having got the food cooked in the kitchen in a certain village, now the third person wandering on the earth sat for partaking of food. For him the mistress of the house served food. Then her younger son wept very much. Then she went under the dominance of anger. (As a result of which) the son was thrown into the fire by her, Partaking of food, he
Pråkrta Exercise Book

175

Page #199

Tumam Suheņa Bhoyanam Karehi. Pacchā Vi Eyam Puttam Jivaissāmi." Tao So Vi Bhoyaṇam Vihiūṇa Siggham Utthio Jāva Tāva Tie Niyagharamajjhão Amayarasakuppayam Āṇiūna Jalaṇammi Chadukkhevo Kao. Bālo Hasanto Niggao. Jananie Ucchange Nio.
4. Tao So Varo Jhayai "Aho Acchariam! Aho Acchariam! Jam Evaṁvihajalaṇajalio Vi Jivio. Jai Eso Amayaraso Maha Havai Tā Ahamavi Tam Kannaṁ Jivävemi" Tti Cintiúna Dhuttattena Küḍavesaṁ Kāūņa Rayanie Tattheva Thio. Avasaram Lahiūna Tam Amayarasakuvayaṁ Ginhiūna Hatthiṇāure Agao.
5. Tena Puna Tie Jaṇayādisamakkham Ciămajjhe Amayaraso Mukko. Sā Sumaikanṇā Sālankārā Jivanti Uṭṭhiyā. Tayȧ Tie Samaṁ Ego Varo Vi Jivio. Kammavassao Puno Cauro Vi Vară Egao Milia. Kanṇāpāniggahantthamannonnam Vivayam Kuṇantā Bālacandarayamandire Gayā. Cauhim Vi Kahiaṁ Rāiņo Niyaniyasarūvaṁ. Rāiņā Mantiņo Bhaniya Jaha- "Eyāṇam Vivayam Bhañjiūņa Ego Varo Pamāṇīkāyavvo." Mantino Vi Savve Paropparaṁ Viyāram Kunanti. Na Puṇa Keṇāvi Vivão Bhajjai. Jao
176

Präkrta Exercise Book

Page #200

(bridegroom) got ready to get up. She said, " Children are not unlovable for any body, for whom parents perform adoration, (give) donations, (pronounces) mantras and (repeat) incantation and what not. You dine happily. Afterwards, I shall make the son alive. Then having eaten food, he got up quickly. At that time having brought the pitcher of nectar from inside the house, she sprinkled that in the fire. The child came out laughing. He was taken into lap by the mother.
4. Then the third bridegroom thinks "Oh! surprise, Oh! wonder, (though he) was burnt with fire, yet he was made to live. If the nectar is for me, then I shall cause to live that girl. Having thought in the way, and having adopted disguise with deceit; he stayed there at night. Having found an opportune time and having taken the pitcher of nectar, he reached Hastinapura.
5. Before her father etc. the nectar was sprinkled again in the pyre by him. That Sumait girl got up, living along with ornaments. Then along with her one bridegroom also was made to live. Owing to the dominance of Karma again all the four bridegrooms met one by one. Arguing with one another for marrying the girl (they) went to the house of the kingBālacanda. Once own claim was put forth before the king by all the four. The ministers were told by the king. Having put to end their disputation with certainty, you all should certify one bridegroom. All the ministers thought mutually. The disputation was not unraveled by any body. Because ........
Prakrta Exercise Book
177

Page #201

Asanne Raņarange Müdhe Mante Taheva Dubbhikkhe Jassa Muham Joijjai So Puriso Mahiyale Viralo
6. Tayā Egena Mantiņā Bhaniyaṁ - "Jai Mannaha Ta Vivāyam Bhajjemi.” Tehim Jampiyam - "Jo Rayahansavva Guņadosaparikkhar Kāūna Pakkhavāyarahio Vāyam Bhañjai Tassa Vayanam Ko Na Mannai?” Tao Tena Bhaniyaṁ -“Jeņa Jiviyā, So Jammaheuttaņeņa Piya Jão. Jo Sahajivio so Egajammatthāņeņa Bhāyā. Jo Atthiņi Gangāmajjhammi Khivium Gao se Pacchāpuņnakaraņeņa Puttasamo Jão. Jeņa Puna Tam Thāņaṁ Rakkhiyar, So Bhattā.” Evaṁ Mantiņā Vivāe Bhagge, Cauttheņa Vareņa Kurucandābhihāņeņa Să Pariņiā.
178
Prākta Exercise Book

Page #202

At the time of nearby battle, at the time of ignorance of duty-awareness, at the time of seeking advice and at the time of famine, he who is available is rare on the earth.
6. Then, it was told by one minister, "If you agree, then I shall solve the dispute. It was told (replied) by them (bridegrooms). Having examined the merits and demerits like the flamingo and having become impartial "If anybody (he who) solves the dispute - who will not accept his judgement. Then it was told by him, (minister)" by whom, she was restored to life he becomes the father on account of being the cause of birth. He who is restored to life together (with her), he became the brother on account of having similar birth-place. He who went to the Ganges for casting bones, is like the son on account of performing the auspicious (actions) afterwards and by whom that place is protected, he is the husband. In this way she was married to Kurucanda the fourth bridegroom owing to the disputation solved by the minister.
Präkrta Exercise Book

179

Page #203

Grammatical Analysis of the Story :
Kassesă Bhajja
180
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #204

Grammatical Analysis
of
Kassesă Bhajja
Kasseså
Sä
(Ta) 1/1 Pro.
[(Kassa) + (Esa)) Kassa (Ka) 6/1 Pro. Adj. Esa (Eta) 1/1 Pro.
Kammapariņa. mavasao
(Kamma)-(Pariņāma). (Vasa) 5/1)
Bhajja
(Bhajjā) 1/1
1.
Jaņaya-Jaņaņi- ((Janaya)-(Janani)Bhaya-Mäulehim (Bhāya)-(Máula) 3/21
Hatthiņaure
(Hatthiņāura) 7/1
Pudho-Pudho
Ind.
Nayare
(Nayara) 7/1
Varäņam
(Vara) 4/2
Suranama
[(Sura) 1/1 - Námā (Ind.)]
Dinna.
(Dinná) PAP. 1/1 Irre.
2.
Rayaputto
(Rayaputta) 1/1
Cauro
(Cau) 1/2 Adj
Ņäņågunarayana- [(Nānā)-(Guna)-(Rayana). Samjutto
(Sarnjutta) PAP 1/1 Irre.
Vi
Ind.
Vasai
(Vasa) PT. 3/1 Intr.
Te
(Ta) 1/2 Pro.
Tassa
(Ta) 6/1 Pro.
Vară
(Vara) 1/2
Bhåriya
(Bhåriya) 1/1
Egammi
*Ega) 7/1 Adj.
Gangabhihaņā
Ceva
Ind.
[(Gangå)+(Abhihāņā)] [(Ganga)-(Abhihảņā) 1/1 Adj.)
Dine
(Dina) 7/1
Parineum
(Parina) Inf.
Siläiguņalańkiya
((Sila)+(Āi)+(Guna)+ (Alarkiya)] [(Sila)-(.1)(Guña)-(Alankiya) 1/1 Adj.]
Ågaya
(Agaya) PAP. 1/2 Irre.
Paropparam
(Paroppara) 2/1 Adv.
Kalaham
(Kalaha) 2/1
Paramasohaggaskrá
[(Parama) Adj. - (Sohagga) - (Sára) 1/1 Adj.)
Kunanti
(Kuna) PT. 3/2 Tr.
Tao
Ind.
Sumainama
[(Sumat)1/1 (Nama) (Ind.)]
Tesim
(Ta) 6/2 Pro.
Tesim
(Ta) 6/2 Pro.
Visame
(Visama) 7/1 Ad). (Sangama) 7/1
Dhùya
(Dhūya) 1/1
Sangame
Prakrta Exercise Book
181

Page #205

Jayamane
(Ja-Jaa) PP. 7/1
Mohamahagaha. ((Moha)-(Maha)-(Gaha). Gahio
(Gaha) PAP. 1/1)
Bahujanakkhayam
[(Bahu)-(Jaņa)(Kkhaya) 2/1)
Mahiyale
(Mahiyala) 7/1
Daţthuņa
(Datthûna) Abs. Irre.
Hindai
(Hinda) PT. 3/1 Tr.
Aggimmi
(Aggi) 7/1
Cauttho
(Cauttha) 1/1 Adj.
Pavittha
(Pavittha) PAP. 1/1 Irre.
Tattheva
[(Tattha)+(Eva)] . Tattha (Adv.), Eva (Ind.)
Sumaikanna
[(Sumai)-(Kanna) 1/1)
Thio
(Thia) PAP.1/1 Irre.
Tie
(Ti) 3/1 Pro.
Tam
(Ta) 2/1 Pro. Adj.
Samam
Ind.
Thảman
(Thina) 2/1
Nividaņehena
[(Nivida) Adj. - (Neha) 3/1)
Rakkhanto
(Rakkha) PP. 1/1
Ego
(Ega) 1/1 Adj.
Paidiņam
Ind.
Varo
(Vara) 1/1
Egamanna pindam
[(Egań)+(Anna) Pindam) [(Egam)-(Anna). Pinda) 2/1)
Vi
Ind.
Pavittho
(Pavittha) PAP. 1/1 Irre.
Muanto
(Mua) PP. 1/1
Ego
(Ega) 1/1 Adj.
Kalam
(Kala) 2/1
Atthiņi
(Atthi) 2/2
Gamei
(Gama) PT. 3/1 Tr.
Gangappavähe
[(Ganga)-(Ppaväha) 7/1]
3.
Khivium
(Khiva) Inf.
Aha
Ind.
Gao
(Gaa) PAP. 1/1 Irre.
Taio
(Taia) 1/1 Adv.
Ego
(Ega) 1/1 Adj.
Naro
(Nara) 1/1
Ciarakkham
[(Cia)-(Rakkha) 2/1)
Mahiyalar
(Mahiyala) 2/1
Tattheva
{(Tattha)+(Eva)] Tattha (Adv.), Eva (Ind.)
Bhamanto
(Bhama) PP. 1/1
Jalapure
[(Jala)-(Pura) 7/1)
Katthavi
Ind.
Khiviúna
(Khiva) Abs.
Game
(Gama) 7/1
Taddukkhena
(Taddukkha) 3/1
Randhaņagharammi
[(Randhana). (Ghara) 7/1)
182
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #206

Bhoanam
(Bhoana) 2/1
Laggo
(Lagga) PAP. 1/1 Irre.
Karáviúņa
(Kara+Ava) Cau. Abs.
Så
(Tả) 171 Pro.
Jimium
(Jima) Inf.
Bhanai
(Bhana) PT. 3/1 Tr.
Uvavittho
(Uvavittha) PAP. 1/1 lrre.
Avaccarūvåni
[(Avacca)-(Ruva) 1/2)
Tassa
(Ta) 4/1 Pro.
Kassa
(Ka) 4/1 Pro.
Gharasāmiņi
[(Ghara)-(Såmiņi) 1/1]
Vi
Ind.
Parivesai
(Parivesa) PT. 3/1 Tr.
Na
Ind.
Taya
Ind.
Appiyani
(Appiya) 1/2 Adj.
Tie
(Ti) 6/1 Pro.
Honti
(Ho) PT. 3/2 Intr.
Lahuputto
[(Lahu) Ad).- (Putta) 1/1)
Jesim
(Ja) 6/2 Pro.
Aiva
Ind.
Kae
Ind.
Roli
(Roa) PT. 3/1 Intr.
Piuno
(Piu) 1/2
Tao
Ind.
Anegadevaya puyådåņamantajavaim
Tie
(Ti) 3/1 Pro.
[(Anega)+(Devaya) + (Puya)+ (Dána)+ (Manta)+(Java)+(Aim)] [(Anega)-(Devaya)(Puya)-(Daņa)(Manta)-(Java)-(AI) 2/1)
Rosapara vvasam
[(Rosa)-(Para)(Vvasa) 2/1)
Gaya
(Gaya) PAP.1/1 Irre.
Ind.
Kim-Kim
(Kim) 1/1 Pro.
So
(Ta) 1/1 Pro.
Na
Ind.
Balo
(Bala) 1/1
Kunanti
(Kuna) PT. 3/2 Tr.
Jalanammi
(Jalana) 7/1
Tumam
(Tumha) 1/1 Pro.
Khivio
(Khiva) PAP. 1/1
Suhena
(Suha) 3/1 Adv.
So
(Ta) 1/1 Pro.
Bhoyanam
(Bhoyana) 2/1
Varo
(Vara) 1/1
Karehi
(Kara) Imp. 2/1 Tr.
Bhoyanam
(Bhoyana) 2/1
Paccha
Ind.
Kunanto
(Kuna) PP. 1/1
Vi
Ind.
Utthium
(Uttha) Inf.
Eyam
{Ea) 2/1 Pro. Adj.
Prákyta Exercise Book
183

Page #207

Puttam
(Putta) 2/1
So
(Ta) 1/1 Pro. Adj.
Jivaissämi
(Jivaa) Fu. 1/1 Tr.
Varo
(Vara) 1/1
Tao
Ind.
Jhayai
(Jha-Jhaa) PT.3/1 Ty.
So
(Ta) 1/1 Pro.
Aho
Ind.
Ind.
Acchariam
(Accharia) 1/1
Bhoyaņam
(Bhoyana) 2/1
Aho
Ind.
Vihiúņa
(Viha) Abs.
Acchariam
(Accharia) 1/1
Siggham
Ind.
Jam
Ind.
Utthio
(Uttha) PAP. 1/1
Evamvihajalanajalio
(Evamviha) (Ind.). ((Jalana)-(Jala)PAP.1/1)
Java Táva
Ind.
Vi
Ind.
Tie
(Ti) 3/1 Pro.
Jivio
(Jiva) PAP. 1/1
Niyagharamajjhão
((Niya) Adv.. (Ghara). (Majjha) 5/1)
Jai
Ind.
Eso
(Eta) 1/1 Pro. Adj.
Amayarasa kuppayam
((Amaya) - (Rasa)· (Kuppa) 2/1 'A' Rim.
Amayaraso
((Amaya)-(Rasa) 1/1)
Aņiūņa
(Ana) Abs.
Maha
(Amha) 4/1 Pro.
Jalanammi
(Jalana) 7/1
Havai
(Hava) PT. 3/1 Intr.
Chadukkhevo
(Chadukkheva) 1/1
Ta
Ind.
Kao
(Kaa) PAP. 1/1 Irre.
Ahamavi
Bålo
(Băla) 1/1
[(Aham)+(Avi)] Aham (Amha) 1/1 Pro. Avi (Ind.)
Hasanto
(Hasa) PP. 1/1
Tam
(Ta) 2/1 Pro. Adj.
Niggao
(Niggaa) PAP. 1/1 Irre.
Kaņpam
(Kanna) 2/1
Jananie
(Janani) 3/1
Jivávemi
Ucchange
(Ucchanga) 7/1
(Jiva+Ava) Cau. PT. 1/1 Tr.
Nio
(Ni) PAP. 1/1
Tti
Ind.
Cintiūņa
(Chinta) Abs.
Tao
Ind.
Dhuttattena
(Dhuttatta) 3/1
184
Praksta Exercise Book

Page #208

Küḍavesam
Kāūņa
Rayanie
Tattheva
Thio
Avasaram
Lahiūna
Tam
Amayarasa
kuvayaṁ
Ginhiūna
Hatthiņäure
Ágao
5.
Teņa
Puna
Tie
Jaṇayādisamakkham
Ciǎmajjhe
Amayaraso
Mukko
Så
Sumaikanņā
[(Kūda)-(Vesa) 2/11 Sälankärä

(Käüna) Abs. Irre.
(Rayani) 7/1
[(Tattha)+ (Eva)
Tattha (Adv.) Eva (Ind.)
(Thla) PAP. 1/1 Irre.
(Avasara) 2/1
(Laha) Abs.
(Ta) 2/1 Pro. Adj.
[(Amaya)-(Rasa)(Küvaya) 2/1]
(Ginha) Abs.
(Hatthinâura) 7/1
(Agaa) PAP. 1/1 Irre.
(Ta) 3/1 Pro.
Ind.
(Ti) 6/1 Pro.
[(Janya)+(Adi)+
(Samakkham)]
[(Janya)-(Adi)
(Samakkha) 1/1]
[(Cia)-(Majjha) 7/1]
[(Amaya)-(Rasa) 1/1]
(Mukka) PAP. 1/1 Irre.
(Ta) 1/1 Pro. Adj.
[(Sumai)-(Kannā)
Pråkrta Exercise Book
1/1]
Jivanti
Uṭthiya
Tayȧ
Tie
Samam
Ego
Varo
VI
Jivio
Kammavassao
Puno
Cauro
Vi
Vară
Egao
Miliä
Vivayam
Kunantȧ
[(Sa)+(Alankarā)] [(Sa)Adj.-(Alańkārā)
Balacandarayamandire
Gaya
1/11

(Jiva) PP. 1/1
(Uttha) PAP. 1/1
Ind.
(Ti) 3/1 Pro.
Ind.
(Ega) 1/1 Adj.
(Vara) 1/1
Ind.
(Jiva) PAP. 1/1
[(Kamma)-(Vassa) 5/1 Adv.]
Ind.
(Cau) 1/2 Adj.
Ind.
(Vara) 1/2
Kanṇāpāniggaha-[(Kanna)+(Pániggahana)+
Ind.
natthamannonnam (Attham)+(Annonnam)] [(Kanna)-(Păniggahana)
(Attha) 2/1
(Annonna) Ind.]
(Mila) PAP. 1/2
(Vivaya) 2/1
(Kuna) PP. 1/2
[(Balacandarāya)
(Mandira) 7/11
(Gaya) PAP. 1/2 Irre.
185

Page #209

Cauhim
(Cau) 3/2
Vivão
(Vivia) 1/1
Vi
Ind.
Bhajjai
(Bhajjai) PT. Pass. 3/1 Tr. Irre.
Kahiam
(Kaha) PAP. 1/1
Jao
Ind.
Raiņo
(Rai) 4/1
Asanne
(Åsanna) 7/1 Adj.
Niyaniyasaruvam
((Niya) Adj. - (Niya) Adj.(Saruva) 1/1)
Ranarange
[(Rana)-(Ranga) 7/1)
Raina
(Rai) 3/1
Müdhe
(Mudha) 7/1
Mantiņo
(Manti) 1/2
Mante
(Manta) 7/1
Bhaniya
(Bhaņa) PAP. 1/2
Taheva
Ind.
Jaha
Ind.
Dubbhikkhe
(Dubbhikkha) 7/1
Eyåņam
(Ea) 6/2 Pro.
Jassa
(ja) 6/1 Pro.
Vivayam
(Vivāya) 2/1
Muham
(Muha) 1/1
Bhañjiúņa
(Bhanja) Abs.
Joijjai
(Jo+lija)PT. Pass. 3/1 Tr.
Ego
(Ega) 1/1 Adj.
So
(Ta) 1/1 Pro.
Varo
(Vara) 1/1
Puriso
(Purisa) 1/1
Pamāņikayavvo
Mahiyale
(Mahiyala) 7/1
(Pamāņikāyavva) OPP. 1/1 Irre.
Viralo
(Virala) 1/1 Adj.
Mantiņo
(Manti) 1/2
Vi
Ind.
Taya
Ind.
Savve
(Savva) 1/2 Pro.
Egeņa
(Ega) 3/1 Adj.
Paropparam
(Paroppara) 2/1 Adv.
Mantina
(Manti) 3/1
Viyaram
(Viyara) 2/1
Bhaniyam
(Bhaņa) PAP. 1/1
Kunanti
(Kuna) PT. 3/2 Tr.
Jai
Ind.
Na
Ind.
Mannaha
(Manna) Imp. 2/2 Tr.
Pupa
Ind.
Тä
Ind.
Kepavi
Vivayam
(Vivāya) 2/1
[(Kena)+(Avi)] Kena (Ka) 3/1 Pro, Avi (Ind.)
Bhajjemi
(Bhajja) PT. 1/1 Tr.
186
Prakrta Exercise Book

Page #210

Tehim
(Ta) 3/2 Pro.
Jo
(Ja) 1/1 Pro.
Jampiyam
(Jampa) PAP. 1/1
Sahajivio
[(Saha (Ind.) - (Jiva) PAP. 1/1)
Jo
(Ja) 1/1 Pro.
So
.
(Ta) 1/1 Pro.
Råyahansavva
[(Rayahansa) 1/1 (Vva (Ind.)]
Egajammathaņeņa
[(Ega)-(Jamma)(Tthana) 3/1)
Guņadosaparikkham
[(Guņa)-(Dosa)(Parikkha) 2/1]
Bhaya
(Bháu) 1/1
Kauņa
(Kauna) Abs. Irre.
Jo
(Ja) 1/1 Pro.
Atthiņi
(Atthi) 2/2
Pakkhavayarahio
[(Pakkhavaya)(Rahia) 1/1 Adj.)
Gangamajjhammi ((Ganga)-(Majjha) 7/1)
Vayam
(Vāya) 2/1
Khivium
(Khiva) Inf.
Bhañjai
(Bhañja) PT. 3/1 Tr.
Gao
(Gaa) PAP. 1/1 Irre.
Tassa
(Ta) 6/1 Pro.
So
(Ta) 1/1 Pro. Adj.
Vayanam
(Vayana) 2/1
Pacchápuņņakaraņeņa
[(Paccha (Ind.) - (Punna). (Karana) 3/1]
Ko
(Ka) 1/1 Pro.
Na
Ind.
Puttasamo
[(Putta)-(Sama)1/1 Adj.]
Mannai
(Manna) PT. 3/1 Tr.
Jảo
(Jāa) PAP. 1/1 Irre.
Tao
Ind.
Jena
(Ja) 3/1 Pro.
Tena
(Ta) 3/1 Pro.
Ind.
Puņa Tar
Bhaniyam
(Bhana) PAP. 1/1
(Ta) 1/1 Pro.
Jeņa
(Ja) 3/1 Pro.
Thanam
(Thána) 1/1
Jiviya
(Jiva) Cau. PAP. 1/1
Rakkhiyam
(Rakkha) PAP. 1/1
So
(Ta) 1/1 Pro.
So
(Ta) 1/1 Pro.
Bhatta
(Bhattu) 1/1
Jammaheuttaneņa
[(Jamma)-(Heu)(Ttana) 3/1]
Evaṁ
Ind.
Piya
(Piu) 1/1
Mantina
(Manti) 3/1
Jảo
(Jáa) PAP. 1/1 Irre.
Vivåe
(Vivåa) 7/1
Praksta Exercise Book
187

Page #211

Bhagge
(Bhagga)PAP. 7/1 Irre.
Cautthena
(Cauttha) 3/1 Adj.
Varena
(Vara) 3/1
Kurucanda bhihåņeņa
[(Kuruchanda) + (Abhihāņeņa)] ((Kuruchanda). (Abhihåņa) 3/1)
Sa
(Ta) 1/1 Pro.
Parinia
(Parini) PAP. 1/1
188
Prakyta Exercise Book

Page #212
www.jainelibran